Add SHF_COMPRESSED support to gas and objcopy
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout-bout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BOUT
44 @set aout-bout
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}] [@b{-o}
238 @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}] [@b{--statistics}]
239 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}] [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}]
240 [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}] [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
241 [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
242 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
243 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
244 @c
245 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
246 @c Add an empty line for separation.
247 @ifset AARCH64
248
249 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
250 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
251 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
252 @end ifset
253 @ifset ALPHA
254
255 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
256 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
257 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
258 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
259 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
260 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
261 @end ifset
262 @ifset ARC
263
264 @emph{Target ARC options:}
265 [@b{-marc[5|6|7|8]}]
266 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
267 @end ifset
268 @ifset ARM
269
270 @emph{Target ARM options:}
271 @c Don't document the deprecated options
272 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
273 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
274 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
275 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
276 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
277 [@b{-mthumb}]
278 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
279 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
280 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
281 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
282 @end ifset
283 @ifset Blackfin
284
285 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
286 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
287 [@b{-mfdpic}]
288 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
289 [@b{-mnopic}]
290 @end ifset
291 @ifset CRIS
292
293 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
294 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
295 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
296 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
297 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
298 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
299 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
300 @end ifset
301 @ifset D10V
302
303 @emph{Target D10V options:}
304 [@b{-O}]
305 @end ifset
306 @ifset D30V
307
308 @emph{Target D30V options:}
309 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
310 @end ifset
311 @ifset EPIPHANY
312
313 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
314 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
315 @end ifset
316 @ifset H8
317
318 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
319 [-h-tick-hex]
320 @end ifset
321 @ifset HPPA
322 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
323 @end ifset
324 @ifset I80386
325
326 @emph{Target i386 options:}
327 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
328 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
329 @end ifset
330 @ifset I960
331
332 @emph{Target i960 options:}
333 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
334 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
335 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
336 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
337 @end ifset
338 @ifset IA64
339
340 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
341 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
342 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
343 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
344 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
345 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
346 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
347 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
348 @end ifset
349 @ifset IP2K
350
351 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
352 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
353 @end ifset
354 @ifset M32C
355
356 @emph{Target M32C options:}
357 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
358 @end ifset
359 @ifset M32R
360
361 @emph{Target M32R options:}
362 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
363 @b{--W[n]p}]
364 @end ifset
365 @ifset M680X0
366
367 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
368 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
369 @end ifset
370 @ifset M68HC11
371
372 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
373 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
374 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
375 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
376 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
377 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
378 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
379 @end ifset
380 @ifset MCORE
381
382 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
383 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
384 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
385 @end ifset
386 @ifset METAG
387
388 @emph{Target Meta options:}
389 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
390 @end ifset
391 @ifset MICROBLAZE
392 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
393 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
394 @end ifset
395 @ifset MIPS
396
397 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
398 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
399 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
400 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
401 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
402 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
403 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
404 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
405 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
406 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
407 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
408 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
409 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
410 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
411 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
412 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
413 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
414 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
415 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
416 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
417 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
418 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
419 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
420 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
421 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
422 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
423 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
424 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
425 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
426 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
427 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
428 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
429 @end ifset
430 @ifset MMIX
431
432 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
433 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
434 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
435 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
436 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
437 @end ifset
438 @ifset NIOSII
439
440 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
441 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
442 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
443 @end ifset
444 @ifset NDS32
445
446 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
447 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
448 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
449 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
450 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
451 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
452 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
453 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
454 [@b{-mb2bb}]
455 @end ifset
456 @ifset PDP11
457
458 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
459 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
460 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
461 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
462 @end ifset
463 @ifset PJ
464
465 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
466 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
467 @end ifset
468 @ifset PPC
469
470 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
471 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
472 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
473 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
474 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
475 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
476 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-ma2}|@b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
477 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
478 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
479 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
480 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
481 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
482 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
483 @end ifset
484 @ifset RL78
485
486 @emph{Target RL78 options:}
487 [@b{-mg10}]
488 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
489 @end ifset
490 @ifset RX
491
492 @emph{Target RX options:}
493 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
494 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
495 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
496 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
497 [@b{-mpid}]
498 [@b{-mrelax}]
499 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
500 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
501 @end ifset
502 @ifset S390
503
504 @emph{Target s390 options:}
505 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
506 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
507 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
508 @end ifset
509 @ifset SCORE
510
511 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
512 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
513 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
514 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
515 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
516 @end ifset
517 @ifset SPARC
518
519 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
520 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
521 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
522 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}]
523 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}]
524 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
525 @end ifset
526 @ifset TIC54X
527
528 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
529 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
530 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
531 @end ifset
532 @ifset TIC6X
533
534 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
535 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
536 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
537 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
538 @end ifset
539 @ifset TILEGX
540
541 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
542 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
543 @end ifset
544 @ifset TILEPRO
545 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
546 @end ifset
547 @ifset VISIUM
548
549 @emph{Target Visium options:}
550 [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
551 @end ifset
552 @ifset XTENSA
553
554 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
555 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
556 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
557 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
558 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
559 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
560 @end ifset
561 @ifset Z80
562
563 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
564 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
565 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
566 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
567 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
568 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
569 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
570 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
571 @end ifset
572 @ifset Z8000
573
574 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
575 @end ifset
576
577 @c man end
578 @end smallexample
579
580 @c man begin OPTIONS
581
582 @table @gcctabopt
583 @include at-file.texi
584
585 @item -a[cdghlmns]
586 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
587
588 @table @gcctabopt
589 @item -ac
590 omit false conditionals
591
592 @item -ad
593 omit debugging directives
594
595 @item -ag
596 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
597
598 @item -ah
599 include high-level source
600
601 @item -al
602 include assembly
603
604 @item -am
605 include macro expansions
606
607 @item -an
608 omit forms processing
609
610 @item -as
611 include symbols
612
613 @item =file
614 set the name of the listing file
615 @end table
616
617 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
618 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
619 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
620
621 @item --alternate
622 Begin in alternate macro mode.
623 @ifclear man
624 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
625 @end ifclear
626
627 @item --compress-debug-sections
628 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed
629 to begin with @samp{.zdebug}, and the resulting object file may not be
630 compatible with older linkers and object file utilities. Note if compression
631 would make a given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed or renamed.
632
633 @ifset ELF
634 @cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
635 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
636 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
637 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
638 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
639 These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
640 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
641 @option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
642 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
643 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} are equivalent to
644 @option{--compress-debug-sections}.
645 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} compresses
646 DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
647 @end ifset
648
649 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
650 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is the default.
651
652 @item -D
653 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
654 other assemblers.
655
656 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
657 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
658 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
659
660 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
661 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
662 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
663 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
664 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
665 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
666
667 @item -f
668 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
669 compiler output).
670
671 @item -g
672 @itemx --gen-debug
673 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
674 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
675 ECOFF or DWARF2.
676
677 @item --gstabs
678 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
679 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
680
681 @item --gstabs+
682 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
683 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
684 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
685 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
686 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
687
688 @item --gdwarf-2
689 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
690 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
691 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
692
693 @item --gdwarf-sections
694 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
695 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
696 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
697 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
698 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
699 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
700 suffix.
701
702 @item --size-check=error
703 @itemx --size-check=warning
704 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
705
706 @item --help
707 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
708
709 @item --target-help
710 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
711
712 @item -I @var{dir}
713 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
714
715 @item -J
716 Don't warn about signed overflow.
717
718 @item -K
719 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
720 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
721 @end ifclear
722 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
723 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
724 @end ifset
725
726 @item -L
727 @itemx --keep-locals
728 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
729 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
730 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
731 @ifclear man
732 @xref{Symbol Names}.
733 @end ifclear
734
735 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
736 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
737 listing to @var{number}.
738
739 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
740 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
741 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
742
743 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
744 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
745 @var{number} bytes.
746
747 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
748 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
749 to @var{number} + 1.
750
751 @item -o @var{objfile}
752 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
753
754 @item -R
755 Fold the data section into the text section.
756
757 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
758 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
759 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
760 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
761 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
762 requirements at the expense of speed.
763
764 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
765 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
766 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
767 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
768
769 @item --statistics
770 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
771 assembly.
772
773 @item --strip-local-absolute
774 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
775
776 @item -v
777 @itemx -version
778 Print the @command{as} version.
779
780 @item --version
781 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
782
783 @item -W
784 @itemx --no-warn
785 Suppress warning messages.
786
787 @item --fatal-warnings
788 Treat warnings as errors.
789
790 @item --warn
791 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
792
793 @item -w
794 Ignored.
795
796 @item -x
797 Ignored.
798
799 @item -Z
800 Generate an object file even after errors.
801
802 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
803 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
804
805 @end table
806 @c man end
807
808 @ifset AARCH64
809
810 @ifclear man
811 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
812 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
813 @end ifclear
814
815 @ifset man
816 @c man begin OPTIONS
817 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
818 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
819 @c man end
820 @c man begin INCLUDE
821 @include c-aarch64.texi
822 @c ended inside the included file
823 @end ifset
824
825 @end ifset
826
827 @ifset ALPHA
828
829 @ifclear man
830 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
831 for an Alpha processor.
832 @end ifclear
833
834 @ifset man
835 @c man begin OPTIONS
836 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
837 processor.
838 @c man end
839 @c man begin INCLUDE
840 @include c-alpha.texi
841 @c ended inside the included file
842 @end ifset
843
844 @end ifset
845
846 @c man begin OPTIONS
847 @ifset ARC
848 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
849 an ARC processor.
850
851 @table @gcctabopt
852 @item -marc[5|6|7|8]
853 This option selects the core processor variant.
854 @item -EB | -EL
855 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
856 @end table
857 @end ifset
858
859 @ifset ARM
860 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
861 processor family.
862
863 @table @gcctabopt
864 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
865 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
866 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
867 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
868 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
869 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
870 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
871 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
872 @item -mthumb
873 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
874 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
875 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
876 @item -EB | -EL
877 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
878 @item -mthumb-interwork
879 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
880 ARM code in mind.
881 @item -mccs
882 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
883 @item -k
884 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
885 @end table
886 @end ifset
887 @c man end
888
889 @ifset Blackfin
890
891 @ifclear man
892 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
893 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
894 @end ifclear
895
896 @ifset man
897 @c man begin OPTIONS
898 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
899 the Blackfin processor family.
900 @c man end
901 @c man begin INCLUDE
902 @include c-bfin.texi
903 @c ended inside the included file
904 @end ifset
905
906 @end ifset
907
908 @c man begin OPTIONS
909 @ifset CRIS
910 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
911 @end ifset
912
913 @ifset D10V
914 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
915 a D10V processor.
916 @table @gcctabopt
917 @cindex D10V optimization
918 @cindex optimization, D10V
919 @item -O
920 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
921 @end table
922 @end ifset
923
924 @ifset D30V
925 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
926 processor.
927 @table @gcctabopt
928 @cindex D30V optimization
929 @cindex optimization, D30V
930 @item -O
931 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
932
933 @cindex D30V nops
934 @item -n
935 Warn when nops are generated.
936
937 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
938 @item -N
939 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
940 @end table
941 @end ifset
942 @c man end
943
944 @ifset EPIPHANY
945 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
946 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
947
948 @ifclear man
949 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
950 configured for an Epiphany processor.
951 @end ifclear
952
953 @ifset man
954 @c man begin OPTIONS
955 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
956 an Epiphany processor.
957 @c man end
958 @c man begin INCLUDE
959 @include c-epiphany.texi
960 @c ended inside the included file
961 @end ifset
962
963 @end ifset
964
965 @ifset H8300
966
967 @ifclear man
968 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
969 for an H8/300 processor.
970 @end ifclear
971
972 @ifset man
973 @c man begin OPTIONS
974 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
975 processor.
976 @c man end
977 @c man begin INCLUDE
978 @include c-h8300.texi
979 @c ended inside the included file
980 @end ifset
981
982 @end ifset
983
984 @ifset I80386
985
986 @ifclear man
987 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
988 configured for an i386 processor.
989 @end ifclear
990
991 @ifset man
992 @c man begin OPTIONS
993 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
994 an i386 processor.
995 @c man end
996 @c man begin INCLUDE
997 @include c-i386.texi
998 @c ended inside the included file
999 @end ifset
1000
1001 @end ifset
1002
1003 @c man begin OPTIONS
1004 @ifset I960
1005 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1006 Intel 80960 processor.
1007
1008 @table @gcctabopt
1009 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
1010 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
1011
1012 @item -b
1013 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
1014
1015 @item -no-relax
1016 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
1017 error if necessary.
1018
1019 @end table
1020 @end ifset
1021
1022 @ifset IP2K
1023 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1024 Ubicom IP2K series.
1025
1026 @table @gcctabopt
1027
1028 @item -mip2022ext
1029 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1030
1031 @item -mip2022
1032 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1033 just the basic IP2022 ones.
1034
1035 @end table
1036 @end ifset
1037
1038 @ifset M32C
1039 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1040 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1041
1042 @table @gcctabopt
1043
1044 @item -m32c
1045 Assemble M32C instructions.
1046
1047 @item -m16c
1048 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1049
1050 @item -relax
1051 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1052
1053 @item -h-tick-hex
1054 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1055
1056 @end table
1057 @end ifset
1058
1059 @ifset M32R
1060 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1061 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1062
1063 @table @gcctabopt
1064
1065 @item --m32rx
1066 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1067 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1068
1069 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1070 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1071 encountered.
1072
1073 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1074 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1075 encountered.
1076
1077 @end table
1078 @end ifset
1079
1080 @ifset M680X0
1081 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1082 Motorola 68000 series.
1083
1084 @table @gcctabopt
1085
1086 @item -l
1087 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1088
1089 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1090 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1091 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1092 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1093 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1094
1095 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1096 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1097 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1098 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1099 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1100 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1101
1102 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1103 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1104 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1105
1106 @end table
1107 @end ifset
1108
1109 @ifset NIOSII
1110
1111 @ifclear man
1112 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1113 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1114 @end ifclear
1115
1116 @ifset man
1117 @c man begin OPTIONS
1118 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1119 Altera Nios II processor.
1120 @c man end
1121 @c man begin INCLUDE
1122 @include c-nios2.texi
1123 @c ended inside the included file
1124 @end ifset
1125 @end ifset
1126
1127 @ifset PDP11
1128
1129 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1130 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1131
1132 @table @gcctabopt
1133 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1134 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1135 default is @option{-mpic}.
1136
1137 @item -mall
1138 @itemx -mall-extensions
1139 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1140
1141 @item -mno-extensions
1142 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1143
1144 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1145 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1146
1147 @item -m@var{cpu}
1148 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1149 disable all other extensions.
1150
1151 @item -m@var{machine}
1152 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1153 model, and disable all other extensions.
1154 @end table
1155
1156 @end ifset
1157
1158 @ifset PJ
1159 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1160 a picoJava processor.
1161
1162 @table @gcctabopt
1163
1164 @cindex PJ endianness
1165 @cindex endianness, PJ
1166 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1167 @item -mb
1168 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1169
1170 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1171 @item -ml
1172 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1173
1174 @end table
1175 @end ifset
1176
1177 @ifset M68HC11
1178 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1179 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1180
1181 @table @gcctabopt
1182
1183 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1184 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1185 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1186
1187 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1188 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1189 XGATE address space.
1190
1191 @item -mshort
1192 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1193
1194 @item -mlong
1195 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1196
1197 @item -mshort-double
1198 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1199
1200 @item -mlong-double
1201 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1202
1203 @item --force-long-branches
1204 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1205 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1206 sub routine.
1207
1208 @item -S | --short-branches
1209 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1210 when the offset is out of range.
1211
1212 @item --strict-direct-mode
1213 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1214 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1215
1216 @item --print-insn-syntax
1217 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1218
1219 @item --print-opcodes
1220 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1221
1222 @item --generate-example
1223 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1224 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1225
1226 @end table
1227 @end ifset
1228
1229 @ifset SPARC
1230 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1231 for the SPARC architecture:
1232
1233 @table @gcctabopt
1234 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1235 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1236 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1237
1238 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1239 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1240
1241 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1242 UltraSPARC extensions.
1243
1244 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1245 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1246 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1247
1248 @item -bump
1249 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1250 @end table
1251 @end ifset
1252
1253 @ifset TIC54X
1254 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1255 architecture.
1256
1257 @table @gcctabopt
1258 @item -mfar-mode
1259 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1260 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1261 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1262 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1263 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1264 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1265 behaviour in the shell.
1266 @end table
1267 @end ifset
1268
1269 @ifset MIPS
1270 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1271 a MIPS processor.
1272
1273 @table @gcctabopt
1274 @item -G @var{num}
1275 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1276 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1277 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1278
1279 @cindex MIPS endianness
1280 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1281 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1282 @item -EB
1283 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1284
1285 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1286 @item -EL
1287 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1288
1289 @cindex MIPS ISA
1290 @item -mips1
1291 @itemx -mips2
1292 @itemx -mips3
1293 @itemx -mips4
1294 @itemx -mips5
1295 @itemx -mips32
1296 @itemx -mips32r2
1297 @itemx -mips32r3
1298 @itemx -mips32r5
1299 @itemx -mips32r6
1300 @itemx -mips64
1301 @itemx -mips64r2
1302 @itemx -mips64r3
1303 @itemx -mips64r5
1304 @itemx -mips64r6
1305 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1306 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1307 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1308 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1309 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1310 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
1311 @samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
1312 MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
1313 Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
1314 MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
1315
1316 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1317 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1318
1319 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1320 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1321
1322 @item -mfix7000
1323 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1324 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1325 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1326
1327 @item -mfix-rm7000
1328 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1329 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1330 followed by a load instruction.
1331
1332 @item -mdebug
1333 @itemx -no-mdebug
1334 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1335 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1336
1337 @item -mpdr
1338 @itemx -mno-pdr
1339 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1340
1341 @item -mgp32
1342 @itemx -mfp32
1343 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1344 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1345 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1346 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1347
1348 @item -mgp64
1349 @itemx -mfp64
1350 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1351 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1352 all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1353 and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1354
1355 @item -mfpxx
1356 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1357 this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1358 which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
1359 32 or 64 bits wide.
1360
1361 @item -modd-spreg
1362 @itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1363 Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1364 registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1365 @samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1366
1367 @item -mips16
1368 @itemx -no-mips16
1369 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1370 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1371 turns off this option.
1372
1373 @item -mmicromips
1374 @itemx -mno-micromips
1375 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1376 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips}
1377 turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1378 at the start of the assembly file.
1379
1380 @item -msmartmips
1381 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1382 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1383 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1384 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1385
1386 @item -mips3d
1387 @itemx -no-mips3d
1388 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1389 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1390 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1391
1392 @item -mdmx
1393 @itemx -no-mdmx
1394 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1395 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1396 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1397
1398 @item -mdsp
1399 @itemx -mno-dsp
1400 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1401 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1402 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1403
1404 @item -mdspr2
1405 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1406 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1407 This option implies -mdsp.
1408 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1409 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1410
1411 @item -mmsa
1412 @itemx -mno-msa
1413 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1414 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1415 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1416
1417 @item -mxpa
1418 @itemx -mno-xpa
1419 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1420 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1421 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1422
1423 @item -mmt
1424 @itemx -mno-mt
1425 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1426 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1427 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1428
1429 @item -mmcu
1430 @itemx -mno-mcu
1431 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1432 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1433 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1434
1435 @item -minsn32
1436 @itemx -mno-insn32
1437 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1438 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1439 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1440 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1441 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1442 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1443 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1444
1445 @item --construct-floats
1446 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1447 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1448 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1449 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1450 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1451 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1452
1453 @item --relax-branch
1454 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1455 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1456 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1457 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1458
1459 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1460 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1461 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1462
1463 @cindex emulation
1464 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1465 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1466 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1467 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1468 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1469
1470 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1471 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1472 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1473 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1474 preferred options instead.
1475
1476 @item -nocpp
1477 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1478 the native tools.
1479
1480 @item --trap
1481 @itemx --no-trap
1482 @itemx --break
1483 @itemx --no-break
1484 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1485 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1486 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1487 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1488 break exception.
1489
1490 @item -n
1491 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1492 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1493 @end table
1494 @end ifset
1495
1496 @ifset MCORE
1497 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1498 an MCore processor.
1499
1500 @table @gcctabopt
1501 @item -jsri2bsr
1502 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1503 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1504 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1505
1506 @item -sifilter
1507 @itemx -nosifilter
1508 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1509 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1510
1511 @item -relax
1512 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1513
1514 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1515 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1516 can be assembled.
1517
1518 @item -EB
1519 Assemble for a big endian target.
1520
1521 @item -EL
1522 Assemble for a little endian target.
1523
1524 @end table
1525 @end ifset
1526 @c man end
1527
1528 @ifset METAG
1529
1530 @ifclear man
1531 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1532 for a Meta processor.
1533 @end ifclear
1534
1535 @ifset man
1536 @c man begin OPTIONS
1537 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1538 Meta processor.
1539 @c man end
1540 @c man begin INCLUDE
1541 @include c-metag.texi
1542 @c ended inside the included file
1543 @end ifset
1544
1545 @end ifset
1546
1547 @c man begin OPTIONS
1548 @ifset MMIX
1549 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1550 @end ifset
1551
1552 @ifset NDS32
1553
1554 @ifclear man
1555 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1556 for a NDS32 processor.
1557 @end ifclear
1558 @c ended inside the included file
1559 @end ifset
1560
1561 @ifset man
1562 @c man begin OPTIONS
1563 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1564 NDS32 processor.
1565 @c man end
1566 @c man begin INCLUDE
1567 @include c-nds32.texi
1568 @c ended inside the included file
1569 @end ifset
1570
1571 @c man end
1572 @ifset PPC
1573
1574 @ifclear man
1575 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1576 for a PowerPC processor.
1577 @end ifclear
1578
1579 @ifset man
1580 @c man begin OPTIONS
1581 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1582 PowerPC processor.
1583 @c man end
1584 @c man begin INCLUDE
1585 @include c-ppc.texi
1586 @c ended inside the included file
1587 @end ifset
1588
1589 @end ifset
1590
1591 @c man begin OPTIONS
1592 @ifset RX
1593 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1594 @end ifset
1595
1596 @ifset S390
1597 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1598 processor family.
1599
1600 @table @gcctabopt
1601 @item -m31
1602 @itemx -m64
1603 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1604 @item -mesa
1605 @item -mzarch
1606 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1607 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1608 @item -march=@var{processor}
1609 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6},
1610 @samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, @samp{z10},
1611 @samp{z196}, @samp{zEC12}, or @samp{z13}.
1612 @item -mregnames
1613 @itemx -mno-regnames
1614 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1615 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1616 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1617 but evaluates to zero.
1618 @end table
1619 @end ifset
1620 @c man end
1621
1622 @ifset TIC6X
1623
1624 @ifclear man
1625 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1626 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1627 @end ifclear
1628
1629 @ifset man
1630 @c man begin OPTIONS
1631 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1632 TMS320C6000 processor.
1633 @c man end
1634 @c man begin INCLUDE
1635 @include c-tic6x.texi
1636 @c ended inside the included file
1637 @end ifset
1638
1639 @end ifset
1640
1641 @ifset TILEGX
1642
1643 @ifclear man
1644 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1645 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1646 @end ifclear
1647
1648 @ifset man
1649 @c man begin OPTIONS
1650 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1651 processor.
1652 @c man end
1653 @c man begin INCLUDE
1654 @include c-tilegx.texi
1655 @c ended inside the included file
1656 @end ifset
1657
1658 @end ifset
1659
1660 @ifset VISIUM
1661
1662 @ifclear man
1663 @xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1664 for a Visium processor.
1665 @end ifclear
1666
1667 @ifset man
1668 @c man begin OPTIONS
1669 The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
1670 processor.
1671 @c man end
1672 @c man begin INCLUDE
1673 @include c-visium.texi
1674 @c ended inside the included file
1675 @end ifset
1676
1677 @end ifset
1678
1679 @ifset XTENSA
1680
1681 @ifclear man
1682 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1683 for an Xtensa processor.
1684 @end ifclear
1685
1686 @ifset man
1687 @c man begin OPTIONS
1688 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1689 Xtensa processor.
1690 @c man end
1691 @c man begin INCLUDE
1692 @include c-xtensa.texi
1693 @c ended inside the included file
1694 @end ifset
1695
1696 @end ifset
1697
1698 @c man begin OPTIONS
1699
1700 @ifset Z80
1701 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1702 a Z80 family processor.
1703 @table @gcctabopt
1704 @item -z80
1705 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1706 @item -r800
1707 Assemble for R800 processor.
1708 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1709 @itemx -Wnud
1710 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1711 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1712 @itemx -Wnup
1713 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1714 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1715 @itemx -Wud
1716 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1717 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1718 @itemx -Wup
1719 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1720 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1721 @itemx -Fud
1722 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1723 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1724 @itemx -Fup
1725 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1726 @end table
1727 @end ifset
1728
1729 @c man end
1730
1731 @menu
1732 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1733 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1734 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1735 * Command Line:: Command Line
1736 * Input Files:: Input Files
1737 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1738 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1739 @end menu
1740
1741 @node Manual
1742 @section Structure of this Manual
1743
1744 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1745 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1746 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1747 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1748 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1749
1750 @ifclear GENERIC
1751 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1752 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1753 @end ifclear
1754 @ifset GENERIC
1755 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1756 various flavors of the assembler.
1757 @end ifset
1758
1759 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1760 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1761 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1762 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1763 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1764 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1765 particular architecture.
1766 @ifset GENERIC
1767 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1768 machine architecture manual for this information.
1769 @end ifset
1770 @ifclear GENERIC
1771 @ifset H8/300
1772 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1773 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1774 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1775 @end ifset
1776 @ifset SH
1777 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1778 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1779 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1780 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1781 @end ifset
1782 @ifset Z8000
1783 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1784 @end ifset
1785 @end ifclear
1786
1787 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1788 @ignore
1789 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1790 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1791 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1792 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1793 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1794 qualification.
1795
1796 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1797 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1798 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1799 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1800 @end ignore
1801
1802 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1803 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1804 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1805 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1806 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1807 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1808 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1809 @c directives).
1810
1811 @node GNU Assembler
1812 @section The GNU Assembler
1813
1814 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1815
1816 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1817 @ifclear GENERIC
1818 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1819 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1820 @end ifclear
1821 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1822 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1823 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1824 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1825 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1826
1827 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1828 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1829 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1830 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1831 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1832 machine would assemble.
1833 @ifset VAX
1834 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1835 @end ifset
1836 @ifset M680X0
1837 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1838 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1839 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1840 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1841 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1842 @end ifset
1843
1844 @c man end
1845
1846 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1847 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1848 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1849
1850 @node Object Formats
1851 @section Object File Formats
1852
1853 @cindex object file format
1854 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1855 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1856 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1857 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1858 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1859 @ifclear GENERIC
1860 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1861 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1862 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1863 @end ifclear
1864 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1865 @ifset I960
1866 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1867 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1868 @end ifset
1869 @ifset HPPA
1870 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1871 SOM or ELF format object files.
1872 @end ifset
1873 @end ifclear
1874
1875 @node Command Line
1876 @section Command Line
1877
1878 @cindex command line conventions
1879
1880 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1881 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
1882 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
1883 significant.
1884
1885 @cindex standard input, as input file
1886 @kindex --
1887 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1888 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1889
1890 @cindex options, command line
1891 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1892 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
1893 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
1894 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1895 the letter is important. All options are optional.
1896
1897 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
1898 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1899 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1900 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
1901
1902 @smallexample
1903 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1904 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1905 @end smallexample
1906
1907 @node Input Files
1908 @section Input Files
1909
1910 @cindex input
1911 @cindex source program
1912 @cindex files, input
1913 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1914 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
1915 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1916 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1917
1918 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1919 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
1920 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1921 order specified.
1922
1923 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1924 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1925 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
1926 (The standard input is also a file.)
1927
1928 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1929 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
1930 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1931 is taken to be an input file name.
1932
1933 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1934 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
1935 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1936 to assemble.
1937
1938 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
1939 in your command line.
1940
1941 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
1942 file.
1943
1944 @c man end
1945
1946 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
1947
1948 @cindex input file linenumbers
1949 @cindex line numbers, in input files
1950 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
1951 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
1952 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
1953 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
1954
1955 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
1956 to @command{@value{AS}}.
1957
1958 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
1959 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
1960 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
1961 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
1962 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
1963 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
1964
1965 @node Object
1966 @section Output (Object) File
1967
1968 @cindex object file
1969 @cindex output file
1970 @kindex a.out
1971 @kindex .o
1972 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
1973 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
1974 is the object file. Its default name is
1975 @ifclear BOUT
1976 @code{a.out}.
1977 @end ifclear
1978 @ifset BOUT
1979 @ifset GENERIC
1980 @code{a.out}, or
1981 @end ifset
1982 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
1983 @end ifset
1984 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
1985 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
1986 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
1987 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
1988 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
1989
1990 @cindex linker
1991 @kindex ld
1992 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
1993 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
1994 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
1995 information for the debugger.
1996
1997 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
1998 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
1999
2000 @node Errors
2001 @section Error and Warning Messages
2002
2003 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2004
2005 @cindex error messages
2006 @cindex warning messages
2007 @cindex messages from assembler
2008 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
2009 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
2010 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
2011 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
2012 grave problem that stops the assembly.
2013
2014 @c man end
2015
2016 @cindex format of warning messages
2017 Warning messages have the format
2018
2019 @smallexample
2020 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
2021 @end smallexample
2022
2023 @noindent
2024 @cindex line numbers, in warnings/errors
2025 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If a logical file name has been given
2026 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) it is used for the filename, otherwise the name of
2027 the current input file is used. If a logical line number was given
2028 @ifset GENERIC
2029 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
2030 @end ifset
2031 then it is used to calculate the number printed,
2032 otherwise the actual line in the current source file is printed. The
2033 message text is intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix
2034 tradition).
2035
2036 @cindex format of error messages
2037 Error messages have the format
2038 @smallexample
2039 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
2040 @end smallexample
2041 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2042 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2043 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2044
2045 @node Invoking
2046 @chapter Command-Line Options
2047
2048 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
2049 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2050 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2051 for options specific
2052 @ifclear GENERIC
2053 to the @value{TARGET} target.
2054 @end ifclear
2055 @ifset GENERIC
2056 to particular machine architectures.
2057 @end ifset
2058
2059 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2060
2061 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2062 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2063 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2064 by commas. For example:
2065
2066 @smallexample
2067 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2068 @end smallexample
2069
2070 @noindent
2071 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2072 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2073 local symbols in the symbol table).
2074
2075 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2076 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2077 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2078 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2079 assembler.)
2080
2081 @c man end
2082
2083 @menu
2084 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2085 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2086 * D:: -D for compatibility
2087 * f:: -f to work faster
2088 * I:: -I for .include search path
2089 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2090 * K:: -K for compatibility
2091 @end ifclear
2092 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2093 * K:: -K for difference tables
2094 @end ifset
2095
2096 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
2097 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2098 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2099 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2100 * o:: -o to name the object file
2101 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
2102 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2103 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2104 * v:: -v to announce version
2105 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2106 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2107 @end menu
2108
2109 @node a
2110 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2111
2112 @kindex -a
2113 @kindex -ac
2114 @kindex -ad
2115 @kindex -ag
2116 @kindex -ah
2117 @kindex -al
2118 @kindex -an
2119 @kindex -as
2120 @cindex listings, enabling
2121 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2122
2123 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2124 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2125 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2126 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2127 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2128 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2129 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2130 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2131 also.
2132
2133 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2134 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2135
2136 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2137 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2138 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2139 omitted from the listing.
2140
2141 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2142 listing.
2143
2144 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2145 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2146 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2147 @code{.sbttl}.
2148 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2149 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2150 listing-control directives have no effect.
2151
2152 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2153 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2154
2155 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2156 because it
2157 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
2158 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2159 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2160 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2161 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2162
2163 @node alternate
2164 @section @option{--alternate}
2165
2166 @kindex --alternate
2167 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2168
2169 @node D
2170 @section @option{-D}
2171
2172 @kindex -D
2173 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2174 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2175 @command{@value{AS}}.
2176
2177 @node f
2178 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2179
2180 @kindex -f
2181 @cindex trusted compiler
2182 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2183 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2184 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2185 and comment preprocessing on
2186 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2187 ,Preprocessing}.
2188
2189 @quotation
2190 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2191 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2192 not work correctly.
2193 @end quotation
2194
2195 @node I
2196 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2197
2198 @kindex -I @var{path}
2199 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2200 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2201 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2202 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2203 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2204 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2205 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2206 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2207 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2208 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2209
2210 @node K
2211 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2212
2213 @kindex -K
2214 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2215 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2216 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2217 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2218 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2219 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2220 alteration on other platforms.
2221 @end ifclear
2222
2223 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2224 @cindex difference tables, warning
2225 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2226 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2227 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2228 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2229 is done.
2230 @end ifset
2231
2232 @node L
2233 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2234
2235 @kindex -L
2236 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2237 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2238 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2239 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2240 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2241 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2242 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2243 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2244
2245 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2246 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2247 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2248
2249 @node listing
2250 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2251
2252 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2253 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2254 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2255 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2256 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2257 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2258 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2259 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2260
2261 @table @gcctabopt
2262 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2263 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2264 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2265 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2266 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2267
2268 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2269 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2270 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2271 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2272 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2273 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2274 switch is used the default is to one.
2275
2276 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2277 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2278 @cindex Width of source line output
2279 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2280 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2281 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2282
2283 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2284 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2285 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2286 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2287 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2288 @end table
2289
2290 @node M
2291 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2292
2293 @kindex -M
2294 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2295 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2296 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2297 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2298 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2299 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2300 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2301 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2302 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2303
2304 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2305 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2306 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2307 individually. These are:
2308
2309 @itemize @bullet
2310 @item global symbols in common section
2311
2312 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2313 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2314 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2315 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2316 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2317
2318 @item complex relocations
2319
2320 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2321 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2322 are not support by other object file formats.
2323
2324 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2325
2326 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2327 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2328 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2329 script.
2330
2331 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2332
2333 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2334 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2335
2336 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2337
2338 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2339 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2340 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2341 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2342 assigned within a linker script.
2343 @end itemize
2344
2345 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2346 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2347 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2348
2349 @itemize @bullet
2350
2351 @item EBCDIC strings
2352
2353 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2354
2355 @item packed binary coded decimal
2356
2357 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2358 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2359
2360 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2361
2362 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2363
2364 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2365
2366 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2367
2368 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2369
2370 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2371 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2372 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2373 these options serve no purpose.
2374
2375 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2376
2377 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2378 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2379 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2380
2381 @item other @code{OPT} options
2382
2383 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2384 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2385
2386 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2387
2388 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2389 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2390
2391 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2392
2393 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2394
2395 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2396
2397 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2398
2399 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2400
2401 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2402
2403 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2404
2405 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2406
2407 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2408
2409 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2410
2411 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2412
2413 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2414
2415 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2416
2417 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2418
2419 @end itemize
2420
2421 @node MD
2422 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2423
2424 @kindex --MD
2425 @cindex dependency tracking
2426 @cindex make rules
2427
2428 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2429 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2430 dependencies of the main source file.
2431
2432 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2433
2434 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2435
2436 @node o
2437 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2438
2439 @kindex -o
2440 @cindex naming object file
2441 @cindex object file name
2442 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2443 default it has the name
2444 @ifset GENERIC
2445 @ifset I960
2446 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2447 @end ifset
2448 @ifclear I960
2449 @file{a.out}.
2450 @end ifclear
2451 @end ifset
2452 @ifclear GENERIC
2453 @ifset I960
2454 @file{b.out}.
2455 @end ifset
2456 @ifclear I960
2457 @file{a.out}.
2458 @end ifclear
2459 @end ifclear
2460 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2461 object file a different name.
2462
2463 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2464 existing file of the same name.
2465
2466 @node R
2467 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2468
2469 @kindex -R
2470 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2471 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2472 @cindex joining text and data sections
2473 @cindex merging text and data sections
2474 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2475 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2476 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2477 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2478 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2479 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2480
2481 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2482 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2483 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2484 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2485
2486 @ifset COFF-ELF
2487 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2488 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2489 @samp{.data}.
2490 @end ifset
2491
2492 @ifset HPPA
2493 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2494 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2495 @end ifset
2496
2497 @node statistics
2498 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2499
2500 @kindex --statistics
2501 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2502 @cindex time, total for assembly
2503 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2504 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2505 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2506 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2507 seconds).
2508
2509 @node traditional-format
2510 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2511
2512 @kindex --traditional-format
2513 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2514 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2515 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2516
2517 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2518 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2519
2520 @node v
2521 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2522
2523 @kindex -v
2524 @kindex -version
2525 @cindex assembler version
2526 @cindex version of assembler
2527 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2528 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2529 command line.
2530
2531 @node W
2532 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2533
2534 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2535 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2536 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2537 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2538
2539 @kindex -W
2540 @kindex --no-warn
2541 @cindex suppressing warnings
2542 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2543 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2544 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2545 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2546 are still reported.
2547
2548 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2549 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2550 @cindex warnings, causing error
2551 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2552 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2553
2554 @kindex --warn
2555 @cindex warnings, switching on
2556 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2557 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2558
2559 @node Z
2560 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2561 @cindex object file, after errors
2562 @cindex errors, continuing after
2563 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2564 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2565 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2566 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2567 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2568 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2569
2570 @node Syntax
2571 @chapter Syntax
2572
2573 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2574 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2575 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2576 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2577 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2578 @ifclear VAX
2579 assembler.
2580 @end ifclear
2581 @ifset VAX
2582 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2583 @end ifset
2584
2585 @menu
2586 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2587 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2588 * Comments:: Comments
2589 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2590 * Statements:: Statements
2591 * Constants:: Constants
2592 @end menu
2593
2594 @node Preprocessing
2595 @section Preprocessing
2596
2597 @cindex preprocessing
2598 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2599 @itemize @bullet
2600 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2601 @item
2602 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2603 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2604 a single space.
2605
2606 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2607 @item
2608 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2609 appropriate number of newlines.
2610
2611 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2612 @item
2613 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2614 @end itemize
2615
2616 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2617 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2618 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2619 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2620 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2621 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2622 Output, gcc.info, Using GNU CC}.
2623
2624 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2625 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2626 preprocessed.
2627
2628 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2629 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2630 @kindex #NO_APP
2631 @kindex #APP
2632 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2633 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2634 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2635 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2636 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2637 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2638 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2639 and whitespace.
2640
2641 @node Whitespace
2642 @section Whitespace
2643
2644 @cindex whitespace
2645 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2646 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2647 people to read. Unless within character constants
2648 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2649 as exactly one space.
2650
2651 @node Comments
2652 @section Comments
2653
2654 @cindex comments
2655 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2656 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2657
2658 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2659 This means you may not nest these comments.
2660
2661 @smallexample
2662 /*
2663 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2664 is to use this sort of comment.
2665 */
2666
2667 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2668 @end smallexample
2669
2670 @cindex line comment character
2671 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2672 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2673 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2674 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2675 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2676 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2677 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2678 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2679
2680 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2681 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2682 to specify logical line numbers:
2683
2684 @kindex #
2685 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2686 @cindex logical line numbers
2687 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2688 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2689 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2690 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2691 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2692
2693 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2694 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2695
2696 @smallexample
2697 # This is an ordinary comment.
2698 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2699 # This is logical line # 36.
2700 @end smallexample
2701 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2702 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2703
2704 @node Symbol Intro
2705 @section Symbols
2706
2707 @cindex characters used in symbols
2708 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2709 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2710 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2711 @samp{_.$}.
2712 @end ifclear
2713 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2714 @ifclear GENERIC
2715 @ifset H8
2716 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2717 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2718 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2719 symbol names.)
2720 @end ifset
2721 @end ifclear
2722 @end ifset
2723 @ifset GENERIC
2724 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2725 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2726 @end ifset
2727 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2728 There is no length limit: all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2729 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2730 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2731 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2732 @cindex length of symbols
2733
2734 @node Statements
2735 @section Statements
2736
2737 @cindex statements, structure of
2738 @cindex line separator character
2739 @cindex statement separator character
2740
2741 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2742 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2743 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2744 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2745 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2746 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2747 exception: they do not end statements.
2748
2749 @cindex newline, required at file end
2750 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2751 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2752 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2753
2754 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2755
2756 @cindex instructions and directives
2757 @cindex directives and instructions
2758 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2759 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2760 @c 13feb91.
2761 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2762 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2763 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2764 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2765 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2766 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2767 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2768 @ifset GENERIC
2769 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2770 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2771 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2772 language.@refill
2773 @end ifset
2774
2775 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2776 @cindex label (@code{:})
2777 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2778 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2779 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2780
2781 @ifset HPPA
2782 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2783 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2784 only one label may be defined on each line.
2785 @end ifset
2786
2787 @smallexample
2788 label: .directive followed by something
2789 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2790 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2791 @end smallexample
2792
2793 @node Constants
2794 @section Constants
2795
2796 @cindex constants
2797 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2798 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2799 @smallexample
2800 @group
2801 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2802 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2803 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2804 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2805 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2806 @end group
2807 @end smallexample
2808
2809 @menu
2810 * Characters:: Character Constants
2811 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2812 @end menu
2813
2814 @node Characters
2815 @subsection Character Constants
2816
2817 @cindex character constants
2818 @cindex constants, character
2819 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2820 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2821 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2822 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2823 used in arithmetic expressions.
2824
2825 @menu
2826 * Strings:: Strings
2827 * Chars:: Characters
2828 @end menu
2829
2830 @node Strings
2831 @subsubsection Strings
2832
2833 @cindex string constants
2834 @cindex constants, string
2835 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2836 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2837 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2838 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2839 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2840 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2841 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2842 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2843
2844 @cindex escape codes, character
2845 @cindex character escape codes
2846 @table @kbd
2847 @c @item \a
2848 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2849 @c
2850 @cindex @code{\b} (backspace character)
2851 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2852 @item \b
2853 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2854
2855 @c @item \e
2856 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2857 @c
2858 @cindex @code{\f} (formfeed character)
2859 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2860 @item \f
2861 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2862
2863 @cindex @code{\n} (newline character)
2864 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
2865 @item \n
2866 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2867
2868 @c @item \p
2869 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2870 @c
2871 @cindex @code{\r} (carriage return character)
2872 @cindex carriage return (@code{\r})
2873 @item \r
2874 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2875
2876 @c @item \s
2877 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
2878 @c other assemblers.
2879 @c
2880 @cindex @code{\t} (tab)
2881 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
2882 @item \t
2883 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2884
2885 @c @item \v
2886 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2887 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2888 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2889 @c
2890 @cindex @code{\@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2891 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2892 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2893 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2894 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2895 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2896
2897 @cindex @code{\@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
2898 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
2899 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
2900 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
2901 lower case @code{x} works.
2902
2903 @cindex @code{\\} (@samp{\} character)
2904 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
2905 @item \\
2906 Represents one @samp{\} character.
2907
2908 @c @item \'
2909 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
2910 @c This is needed in single character literals
2911 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
2912 @c a @samp{'}.
2913 @c
2914 @cindex @code{\"} (doublequote character)
2915 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
2916 @item \"
2917 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
2918 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
2919
2920 @item \ @var{anything-else}
2921 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
2922 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
2923 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
2924 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
2925 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
2926 code and warns you of the fact.
2927 @end table
2928
2929 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
2930 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
2931 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
2932 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
2933 sequence.
2934
2935 @node Chars
2936 @subsubsection Characters
2937
2938 @cindex single character constant
2939 @cindex character, single
2940 @cindex constant, single character
2941 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
2942 followed by that character. The same escapes apply to characters as
2943 to strings. So if you want to write the character backslash, you
2944 must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
2945 @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
2946 grave accent. A newline
2947 @ifclear GENERIC
2948 @ifclear abnormal-separator
2949 (or semicolon @samp{;})
2950 @end ifclear
2951 @ifset abnormal-separator
2952 @ifset H8
2953 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
2954 Renesas SH)
2955 @end ifset
2956 @end ifset
2957 @end ifclear
2958 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
2959 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
2960 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
2961 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
2962 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
2963
2964 @node Numbers
2965 @subsection Number Constants
2966
2967 @cindex constants, number
2968 @cindex number constants
2969 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
2970 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
2971 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
2972 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
2973 are floating point numbers, described below.
2974
2975 @menu
2976 * Integers:: Integers
2977 * Bignums:: Bignums
2978 * Flonums:: Flonums
2979 @ifclear GENERIC
2980 @ifset I960
2981 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
2982 @end ifset
2983 @end ifclear
2984 @end menu
2985
2986 @node Integers
2987 @subsubsection Integers
2988 @cindex integers
2989 @cindex constants, integer
2990
2991 @cindex binary integers
2992 @cindex integers, binary
2993 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
2994 the binary digits @samp{01}.
2995
2996 @cindex octal integers
2997 @cindex integers, octal
2998 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
2999 digits (@samp{01234567}).
3000
3001 @cindex decimal integers
3002 @cindex integers, decimal
3003 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
3004 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
3005
3006 @cindex hexadecimal integers
3007 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
3008 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
3009 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
3010
3011 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
3012 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
3013 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
3014
3015 @node Bignums
3016 @subsubsection Bignums
3017
3018 @cindex bignums
3019 @cindex constants, bignum
3020 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
3021 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
3022 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
3023 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
3024
3025 @node Flonums
3026 @subsubsection Flonums
3027 @cindex flonums
3028 @cindex floating point numbers
3029 @cindex constants, floating point
3030
3031 @cindex precision, floating point
3032 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
3033 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
3034 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
3035 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
3036 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
3037 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
3038
3039 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
3040 @itemize @bullet
3041 @item
3042 The digit @samp{0}.
3043 @ifset HPPA
3044 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3045 @end ifset
3046
3047 @item
3048 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3049 @ifset GENERIC
3050 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
3051 @ignore
3052 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3053 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
3054 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3055 @end ignore
3056
3057 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
3058 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
3059 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3060
3061 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3062 (in upper or lower case).
3063
3064 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
3065 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3066
3067 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3068 @end ifset
3069 @ifclear GENERIC
3070 @ifset ARC
3071 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3072 @end ifset
3073 @ifset H8
3074 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3075 @end ifset
3076 @ifset HPPA
3077 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3078 @end ifset
3079 @ifset I960
3080 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3081 @end ifset
3082 @end ifclear
3083
3084 @item
3085 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3086
3087 @item
3088 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3089
3090 @item
3091 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3092 or more decimal digits.
3093
3094 @item
3095 An optional exponent, consisting of:
3096
3097 @itemize @bullet
3098 @item
3099 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3100 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3101 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3102 @item
3103 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3104 @item
3105 One or more decimal digits.
3106 @end itemize
3107
3108 @end itemize
3109
3110 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3111 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3112
3113 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3114 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3115 @command{@value{AS}}.
3116
3117 @ifclear GENERIC
3118 @ifset I960
3119 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
3120 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
3121 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
3122 @node Bit Fields
3123 @subsubsection Bit Fields
3124
3125 @cindex bit fields
3126 @cindex constants, bit field
3127 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
3128 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
3129 @example
3130 @var{mask}:@var{value}
3131 @end example
3132 @noindent
3133 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
3134 @var{value}.
3135
3136 The resulting number is then packed
3137 @ifset GENERIC
3138 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
3139 (in host-dependent byte order)
3140 @end ifset
3141 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
3142 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
3143 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
3144 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
3145 least significant digits.@refill
3146
3147 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
3148 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
3149 @end ifset
3150 @end ifclear
3151
3152 @node Sections
3153 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3154 @cindex sections
3155 @cindex relocation
3156
3157 @menu
3158 * Secs Background:: Background
3159 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3160 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3161 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3162 * bss:: bss Section
3163 @end menu
3164
3165 @node Secs Background
3166 @section Background
3167
3168 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3169 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3170 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3171
3172 @cindex linker, and assembler
3173 @cindex assembler, and linker
3174 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3175 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3176 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3177 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3178 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3179 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3180 sections.
3181
3182 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3183 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3184 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3185 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3186 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3187 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3188 the proper run-time addresses.
3189 @ifset H8
3190 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3191 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3192 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3193 @end ifset
3194
3195 @cindex standard assembler sections
3196 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3197 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3198 @dfn{bss} sections.
3199
3200 @ifset COFF-ELF
3201 @ifset GENERIC
3202 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3203 @end ifset
3204 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3205 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3206 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3207 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3208 @end ifset
3209
3210 @ifset HPPA
3211 @ifset GENERIC
3212 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3213 @end ifset
3214 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3215 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3216 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3217 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3218 assembler directives.
3219
3220 @ifset SOM
3221 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3222 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3223 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3224 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3225 @end ifset
3226 @end ifset
3227
3228 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3229 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3230
3231 @ifset HPPA
3232 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3233 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3234 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3235 @end ifset
3236
3237 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3238 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3239 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3240 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3241 file is mentioned:
3242 @itemize @bullet
3243 @item
3244 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3245 an address?
3246 @item
3247 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3248 @item
3249 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3250 @display
3251 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3252 @end display
3253 @item
3254 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3255 @end itemize
3256
3257 @cindex addresses, format of
3258 @cindex section-relative addressing
3259 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3260 @display
3261 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3262 @end display
3263 @noindent
3264 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3265 nature.
3266 @ifset SOM
3267 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3268 symbol-relative instead.)
3269 @end ifset
3270
3271 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3272 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3273
3274 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3275 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3276 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3277 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3278 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3279 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3280 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3281 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3282 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3283
3284 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3285 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3286 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3287 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3288 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3289 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3290 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3291
3292 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3293 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3294 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3295 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3296 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3297 data and bss sections.
3298
3299 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3300 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3301
3302 @node Ld Sections
3303 @section Linker Sections
3304 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3305
3306 @table @strong
3307
3308 @ifset COFF-ELF
3309 @cindex named sections
3310 @cindex sections, named
3311 @item named sections
3312 @end ifset
3313 @ifset aout-bout
3314 @cindex text section
3315 @cindex data section
3316 @itemx text section
3317 @itemx data section
3318 @end ifset
3319 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3320 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3321 true of another.
3322 @c @ifset aout-bout
3323 When the program is running, however, it is
3324 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3325 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3326 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3327 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3328 in the data section.
3329 @c @end ifset
3330
3331 @cindex bss section
3332 @item bss section
3333 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3334 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3335 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3336 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3337 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3338 those explicit zeros from object files.
3339
3340 @cindex absolute section
3341 @item absolute section
3342 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3343 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3344 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3345 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3346
3347 @cindex undefined section
3348 @item undefined section
3349 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3350 the preceding sections.
3351 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3352 @end table
3353
3354 @cindex relocation example
3355 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3356 @ifset COFF-ELF
3357 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3358 @end ifset
3359 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3360
3361 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3362 @ifnottex
3363 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3364 @smallexample
3365 +-----+----+--+
3366 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3367 +-----+----+--+
3368
3369 text data bss
3370 seg. seg. seg.
3371
3372 +---+---+---+
3373 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3374 +---+---+---+
3375
3376 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3377 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3378 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3379
3380 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3381 @end smallexample
3382 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3383 @end ifnottex
3384 @need 5000
3385 @tex
3386 \bigskip
3387 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3388 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3389 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3390
3391 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3392 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3393 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3394
3395 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3396 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3397 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3398 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3399 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3400
3401 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3402 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3403
3404 @end tex
3405 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3406
3407 @node As Sections
3408 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3409
3410 @cindex internal assembler sections
3411 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3412 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3413 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3414 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3415 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3416 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3417 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3418 section-relative address.
3419
3420 @table @b
3421 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3422 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3423 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3424 bug in the assembler.
3425
3426 @cindex expr (internal section)
3427 @item expr section
3428 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3429 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3430 it in the expr section.
3431 @c FIXME item debug
3432 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3433 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3434 @c FIXME item register
3435 @end table
3436
3437 @node Sub-Sections
3438 @section Sub-Sections
3439
3440 @cindex numbered subsections
3441 @cindex grouping data
3442 @ifset aout-bout
3443 Assembled bytes
3444 @ifset COFF-ELF
3445 conventionally
3446 @end ifset
3447 fall into two sections: text and data.
3448 @end ifset
3449 You may have separate groups of
3450 @ifset GENERIC
3451 data in named sections
3452 @end ifset
3453 @ifclear GENERIC
3454 @ifclear aout-bout
3455 data in named sections
3456 @end ifclear
3457 @ifset aout-bout
3458 text or data
3459 @end ifset
3460 @end ifclear
3461 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3462 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3463 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3464 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3465 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3466 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3467 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3468 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3469 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3470 constants being output.
3471
3472 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3473 goes in subsection number zero.
3474
3475 @ifset GENERIC
3476 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3477 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3478 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3479 @end ifset
3480 @ifclear GENERIC
3481 @ifset H8
3482 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3483 boundary (two bytes).
3484 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3485 @end ifset
3486 @ifset I960
3487 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3488 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3489 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3490 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3491 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3492 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3493 @end ifset
3494 @end ifclear
3495
3496 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3497 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3498 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3499 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3500 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3501 data subsections as a data section.
3502
3503 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3504 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3505 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3506 @ifset COFF
3507 @ifset GENERIC
3508 When generating COFF output, you
3509 @end ifset
3510 @ifclear GENERIC
3511 You
3512 @end ifclear
3513 can also use an extra subsection
3514 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3515 @var{expression}}.
3516 @end ifset
3517 @ifset ELF
3518 @ifset GENERIC
3519 When generating ELF output, you
3520 @end ifset
3521 @ifclear GENERIC
3522 You
3523 @end ifclear
3524 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3525 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3526 @end ifset
3527 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3528 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3529 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3530 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3531 @smallexample
3532 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3533 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3534 .text 1
3535 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3536 .data 0
3537 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3538 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3539 .text 0
3540 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3541 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3542 @end smallexample
3543
3544 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3545 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3546 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3547 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3548 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3549 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3550 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3551
3552 @node bss
3553 @section bss Section
3554
3555 @cindex bss section
3556 @cindex common variable storage
3557 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3558 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3559 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3560 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3561 section are zeroed bytes.
3562
3563 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3564 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3565
3566 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3567 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3568
3569 @ifset GENERIC
3570 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3571 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3572 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3573 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3574 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3575 @end ifset
3576
3577 @node Symbols
3578 @chapter Symbols
3579
3580 @cindex symbols
3581 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3582 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3583 to debug.
3584
3585 @quotation
3586 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3587 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3588 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3589 @end quotation
3590
3591 @menu
3592 * Labels:: Labels
3593 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3594 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3595 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3596 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3597 @end menu
3598
3599 @node Labels
3600 @section Labels
3601
3602 @cindex labels
3603 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3604 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3605 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3606 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3607 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3608 definitions.
3609
3610 @ifset HPPA
3611 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3612 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3613 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3614 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3615 @end ifset
3616
3617 @node Setting Symbols
3618 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3619
3620 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3621 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3622 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3623 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3624 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3625 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3626 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3627 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3628
3629 @ifset Blackfin
3630 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3631 @end ifset
3632
3633 @node Symbol Names
3634 @section Symbol Names
3635
3636 @cindex symbol names
3637 @cindex names, symbol
3638 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3639 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3640 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3641 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3642 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3643 particular target machine), and underscores.
3644 @end ifclear
3645 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3646 @ifset H8
3647 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3648 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3649 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3650 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3651 @end ifset
3652 @end ifset
3653
3654 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3655 than @code{Foo}.
3656
3657 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3658 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3659 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3660 currently supported.
3661
3662 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3663 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3664 in a program.
3665
3666 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3667
3668 @cindex local symbol names
3669 @cindex symbol names, local
3670 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3671 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3672 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3673 set of local label prefixes.
3674 @ifset HPPA
3675 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3676 @end ifset
3677
3678 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3679 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3680 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
3681 to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3682
3683 @subheading Local Labels
3684
3685 @cindex local labels
3686 @cindex temporary symbol names
3687 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3688 Local labels help compilers and programmers use names temporarily.
3689 They create symbols which are guaranteed to be unique over the entire scope of
3690 the input source code and which can be referred to by a simple notation.
3691 To define a local label, write a label of the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N}
3692 represents any positive integer). To refer to the most recent previous
3693 definition of that label write @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when
3694 you defined the label. To refer to the next definition of a local label, write
3695 @samp{@b{N}f}---the @samp{b} stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands
3696 for ``forwards''.
3697
3698 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3699 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3700 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3701 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3702 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3703 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3704 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3705
3706 Here is an example:
3707
3708 @smallexample
3709 1: branch 1f
3710 2: branch 1b
3711 1: branch 2f
3712 2: branch 1b
3713 @end smallexample
3714
3715 Which is the equivalent of:
3716
3717 @smallexample
3718 label_1: branch label_3
3719 label_2: branch label_1
3720 label_3: branch label_4
3721 label_4: branch label_3
3722 @end smallexample
3723
3724 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3725 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3726 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3727 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3728 these parts:
3729
3730 @table @code
3731 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3732 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3733 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3734 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3735 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3736 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3737 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3738 you may use them in debugging.
3739
3740 @item @var{number}
3741 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3742 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3743
3744 @item @kbd{C-B}
3745 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3746 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3747
3748 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3749 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3750 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3751 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3752 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3753 @end table
3754
3755 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3756 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3757
3758 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3759 @cindex dollar local symbols
3760
3761 @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of local labels called
3762 dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they become undefined) as
3763 soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain valid for only a small
3764 region of the input source code. Normal local labels, by contrast, remain in
3765 scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined by another occurrence of
3766 the same local label.
3767
3768 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3769 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3770 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3771
3772 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3773 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3774 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3775 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3776
3777 @node Dot
3778 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3779
3780 @cindex dot (symbol)
3781 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3782 @cindex current address
3783 @cindex location counter
3784 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3785 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3786 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3787 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3788 directive.
3789 @ifclear no-space-dir
3790 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3791 @samp{.space 4}.
3792 @end ifclear
3793
3794 @node Symbol Attributes
3795 @section Symbol Attributes
3796
3797 @cindex symbol attributes
3798 @cindex attributes, symbol
3799 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3800 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3801 attributes.
3802 @ifset INTERNALS
3803 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3804 @end ifset
3805
3806 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3807 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3808 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3809 would want.
3810
3811 @menu
3812 * Symbol Value:: Value
3813 * Symbol Type:: Type
3814 @ifset aout-bout
3815 @ifset GENERIC
3816 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3817 @end ifset
3818 @ifclear GENERIC
3819 @ifclear BOUT
3820 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3821 @end ifclear
3822 @ifset BOUT
3823 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3824 @end ifset
3825 @end ifclear
3826 @end ifset
3827 @ifset COFF
3828 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3829 @end ifset
3830 @ifset SOM
3831 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3832 @end ifset
3833 @end menu
3834
3835 @node Symbol Value
3836 @subsection Value
3837
3838 @cindex value of a symbol
3839 @cindex symbol value
3840 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3841 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3842 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3843 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3844 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
3845 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3846 called absolute.
3847
3848 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
3849 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3850 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3851 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3852 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3853 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3854 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
3855 allocated storage.
3856
3857 @node Symbol Type
3858 @subsection Type
3859
3860 @cindex type of a symbol
3861 @cindex symbol type
3862 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3863 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3864 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
3865 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3866
3867 @ifset aout-bout
3868 @ifclear GENERIC
3869 @ifset BOUT
3870 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
3871 @c better if it were available outside examples.
3872 @need 1000
3873 @node a.out Symbols
3874 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3875
3876 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3877 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3878 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3879 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3880 @code{b.out}.
3881
3882 @end ifset
3883 @ifclear BOUT
3884 @node a.out Symbols
3885 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3886
3887 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3888 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3889
3890 @end ifclear
3891 @end ifclear
3892 @ifset GENERIC
3893 @node a.out Symbols
3894 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3895
3896 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3897 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3898
3899 @end ifset
3900 @menu
3901 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
3902 * Symbol Other:: Other
3903 @end menu
3904
3905 @node Symbol Desc
3906 @subsubsection Descriptor
3907
3908 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
3909 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
3910 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
3911 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
3912 @command{@value{AS}}.
3913
3914 @node Symbol Other
3915 @subsubsection Other
3916
3917 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
3918 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
3919 @end ifset
3920
3921 @ifset COFF
3922 @node COFF Symbols
3923 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
3924
3925 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
3926 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
3927
3928 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
3929 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
3930 @code{.endef} directives.
3931
3932 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
3933
3934 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
3935 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
3936 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
3937
3938 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
3939
3940 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
3941 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
3942 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
3943 table information for COFF.
3944 @end ifset
3945
3946 @ifset SOM
3947 @node SOM Symbols
3948 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
3949
3950 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
3951 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
3952
3953 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
3954 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
3955
3956 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
3957 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
3958 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
3959 @end ifset
3960
3961 @node Expressions
3962 @chapter Expressions
3963
3964 @cindex expressions
3965 @cindex addresses
3966 @cindex numeric values
3967 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
3968 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
3969
3970 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
3971 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
3972 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
3973 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
3974 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
3975 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
3976
3977 @menu
3978 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
3979 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
3980 @end menu
3981
3982 @node Empty Exprs
3983 @section Empty Expressions
3984
3985 @cindex empty expressions
3986 @cindex expressions, empty
3987 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
3988 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
3989 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
3990 is compatible with other assemblers.
3991
3992 @node Integer Exprs
3993 @section Integer Expressions
3994
3995 @cindex integer expressions
3996 @cindex expressions, integer
3997 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
3998 by @emph{operators}.
3999
4000 @menu
4001 * Arguments:: Arguments
4002 * Operators:: Operators
4003 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
4004 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
4005 @end menu
4006
4007 @node Arguments
4008 @subsection Arguments
4009
4010 @cindex expression arguments
4011 @cindex arguments in expressions
4012 @cindex operands in expressions
4013 @cindex arithmetic operands
4014 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
4015 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
4016 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
4017 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
4018 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
4019 instruction operands.
4020
4021 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
4022 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
4023 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
4024 integer.
4025
4026 Numbers are usually integers.
4027
4028 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
4029 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
4030 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
4031 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
4032 assemblers.
4033
4034 @cindex subexpressions
4035 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
4036 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
4037 operator followed by an argument.
4038
4039 @node Operators
4040 @subsection Operators
4041
4042 @cindex operators, in expressions
4043 @cindex arithmetic functions
4044 @cindex functions, in expressions
4045 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
4046 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
4047 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4048 whitespace.
4049
4050 @node Prefix Ops
4051 @subsection Prefix Operator
4052
4053 @cindex prefix operators
4054 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
4055 one argument, which must be absolute.
4056
4057 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4058 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4059 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4060 @tex
4061 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4062 @end tex
4063
4064 @table @code
4065 @item -
4066 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
4067 @item ~
4068 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
4069 @end table
4070
4071 @tex
4072 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4073 @end tex
4074
4075 @node Infix Ops
4076 @subsection Infix Operators
4077
4078 @cindex infix operators
4079 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
4080 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
4081 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4082 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4083 absolute, and the result is absolute.
4084
4085 @enumerate
4086 @cindex operator precedence
4087 @cindex precedence of operators
4088
4089 @item
4090 Highest Precedence
4091
4092 @table @code
4093 @item *
4094 @dfn{Multiplication}.
4095
4096 @item /
4097 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4098
4099 @item %
4100 @dfn{Remainder}.
4101
4102 @item <<
4103 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4104
4105 @item >>
4106 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4107 @end table
4108
4109 @item
4110 Intermediate precedence
4111
4112 @table @code
4113 @item |
4114
4115 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4116
4117 @item &
4118 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4119
4120 @item ^
4121 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4122
4123 @item !
4124 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4125 @end table
4126
4127 @item
4128 Low Precedence
4129
4130 @table @code
4131 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4132 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4133 @cindex arguments for addition
4134 @item +
4135 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4136 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4137 sections.
4138
4139 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4140 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4141 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4142 @item -
4143 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4144 result has the section of the left argument.
4145 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4146 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4147 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4148
4149 @cindex comparison expressions
4150 @cindex expressions, comparison
4151 @item ==
4152 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4153 @item <>
4154 @itemx !=
4155 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4156 @item <
4157 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4158 @item >
4159 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4160 @item >=
4161 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4162 @item <=
4163 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4164
4165 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4166 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4167 perform signed comparisons.
4168 @end table
4169
4170 @item Lowest Precedence
4171
4172 @table @code
4173 @item &&
4174 @dfn{Logical And}.
4175
4176 @item ||
4177 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4178
4179 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4180 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4181 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4182 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4183
4184 @end table
4185 @end enumerate
4186
4187 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4188 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4189
4190 @node Pseudo Ops
4191 @chapter Assembler Directives
4192
4193 @cindex directives, machine independent
4194 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4195 @cindex machine independent directives
4196 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4197 The rest of the name is letters, usually in lower case.
4198
4199 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4200 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4201 @ifset GENERIC
4202 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4203 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4204 @end ifset
4205 @ifclear GENERIC
4206 @ifset machine-directives
4207 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4208 @end ifset
4209 @end ifclear
4210
4211 @menu
4212 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4213 @ifset COFF
4214 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4215 @end ifset
4216
4217 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4218 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4219 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4220 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4221 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4222 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, @code{.bundle_lock}, @code{.bundle_unlock}
4223 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4224 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4225 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4226 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4227 @ifset COFF
4228 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4229 @end ifset
4230 @ifset aout-bout
4231 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4232 @end ifset
4233 @ifset COFF
4234 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4235 @end ifset
4236
4237 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4238 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4239 * Else:: @code{.else}
4240 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4241 * End:: @code{.end}
4242 @ifset COFF
4243 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4244 @end ifset
4245
4246 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4247 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4248 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4249 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4250 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4251 * Err:: @code{.err}
4252 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4253 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4254 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4255 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4256 * File:: @code{.file}
4257 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4258 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4259 * Func:: @code{.func}
4260 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4261 @ifset ELF
4262 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4263 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4264 @end ifset
4265
4266 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4267 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4268 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4269 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4270 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4271 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4272 @ifset ELF
4273 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4274 @end ifset
4275
4276 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4277 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4278 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4279 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4280 @ifclear no-line-dir
4281 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4282 @end ifclear
4283
4284 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4285 * List:: @code{.list}
4286 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4287 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4288 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4289 @ifset ELF
4290 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4291 @end ifset
4292
4293 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4294 @ignore
4295 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4296 @end ignore
4297
4298 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4299 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4300 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4301 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4302 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4303 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4304 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4305 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4306 @ifset ELF
4307 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4308 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4309 @end ifset
4310
4311 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4312 @ifset ELF
4313 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4314 @end ifset
4315
4316 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4317 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4318 @ifset ELF
4319 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4320 @end ifset
4321
4322 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4323 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4324 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4325 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4326 @ifset COFF
4327 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4328 @end ifset
4329 @ifset COFF-ELF
4330 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4331 @end ifset
4332
4333 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4334 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4335 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4336 @ifset COFF-ELF
4337 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4338 @end ifset
4339 @ifclear no-space-dir
4340 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4341 @end ifclear
4342
4343 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4344 @ifclear no-space-dir
4345 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4346 @end ifclear
4347 @ifset have-stabs
4348 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4349 @end ifset
4350
4351 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4352 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4353 @ifset ELF
4354 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4355 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4356 @end ifset
4357
4358 @ifset COFF
4359 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4360 @end ifset
4361
4362 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4363 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4364 @ifset COFF-ELF
4365 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4366 @end ifset
4367
4368 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4369 @ifset COFF
4370 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4371 @end ifset
4372
4373 @ifset ELF
4374 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4375 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4376 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4377 @end ifset
4378
4379 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4380 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4381 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4382 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4383 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4384 @end menu
4385
4386 @node Abort
4387 @section @code{.abort}
4388
4389 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4390 @cindex stopping the assembly
4391 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4392 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4393 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4394 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4395 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4396
4397 @ifset COFF
4398 @node ABORT (COFF)
4399 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4400
4401 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4402 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4403 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4404
4405 @ifset BOUT
4406 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4407 but ignores it.
4408 @end ifset
4409 @end ifset
4410
4411 @node Align
4412 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4413
4414 @cindex padding the location counter
4415 @cindex @code{align} directive
4416 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4417 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4418 required, as described below.
4419
4420 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4421 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4422 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4423 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4424 with no-op instructions.
4425
4426 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4427 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4428 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4429 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4430 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4431 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4432 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4433
4434 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4435 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4436 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4437 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4438 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4439 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4440 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4441
4442 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4443 strongarm, it is the
4444 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4445 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4446 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4447 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4448
4449 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4450 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4451 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4452 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4453 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4454
4455 @node Altmacro
4456 @section @code{.altmacro}
4457 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4458
4459 @ftable @code
4460 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4461 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4462 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4463 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4464 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4465 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4466 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4467
4468 @item String delimiters
4469 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4470 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4471
4472 @table @code
4473 @item '@var{string}'
4474 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4475
4476 @item <@var{string}>
4477 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4478 @end table
4479
4480 @item single-character string escape
4481 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4482 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4483 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4484 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4485
4486 @item Expression results as strings
4487 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4488 and use the result as a string.
4489 @end ftable
4490
4491 @node Ascii
4492 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4493
4494 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4495 @cindex string literals
4496 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4497 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4498 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4499
4500 @node Asciz
4501 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4502
4503 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4504 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4505 @cindex null-terminated strings
4506 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4507 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4508
4509 @node Balign
4510 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4511
4512 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4513 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4514 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4515 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4516 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4517 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4518 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4519
4520 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4521 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4522 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4523 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4524 with no-op instructions.
4525
4526 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4527 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4528 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4529 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4530 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4531 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4532 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4533
4534 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4535 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4536 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4537 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4538 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4539 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4540 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4541 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4542 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4543 undefined.
4544
4545 @node Bundle directives
4546 @section @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4547 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4548 @cindex bundle
4549 @cindex instruction bundle
4550 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4551 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4552 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4553 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4554 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4555 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4556 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4557
4558 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4559 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4560 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4561 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4562 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4563 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4564 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4565 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4566 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4567 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4568 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4569
4570 @section @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4571 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4572 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4573 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4574 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4575 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4576 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4577 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4578 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4579
4580 @cindex bundle-locked
4581 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4582 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4583 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4584 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4585 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4586 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4587 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4588 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4589 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4590 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4591 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4592 bundle size.
4593
4594 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4595 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4596 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4597 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4598 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4599 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4600
4601 @node Byte
4602 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4603
4604 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4605 @cindex integers, one byte
4606 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4607 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4608
4609 @node CFI directives
4610 @section @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4611 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4612 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4613 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4614 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4615 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4616 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4617 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4618
4619 @section @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4620 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4621 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4622 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4623 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4624 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4625
4626 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4627 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4628
4629 @section @code{.cfi_endproc}
4630 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4631 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4632 unwind entry previously opened by
4633 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4634
4635 @section @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4636 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4637 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4638 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4639 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4640 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4641 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4642 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4643 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4644 no personality routine.
4645
4646 @section @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4647 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4648 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4649 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4650 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be a constant
4651 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4652 no LSDA.
4653
4654 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4655 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4656 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4657
4658 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4659 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4660 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4661 remains the same.
4662
4663 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4664 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4665 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4666 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4667 CFA address.
4668
4669 @section @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4670 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4671 value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4672
4673 @section @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4674 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4675 CFA.
4676
4677 @section @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4678 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4679 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4680 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4681 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4682 code it's annotating.
4683
4684 @section @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4685 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4686
4687 @section @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4688 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4689 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4690 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4691
4692 @section @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4693 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4694
4695 @section @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4696 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4697 i.e. no restoration needed.
4698
4699 @section @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4700 First save all current rules for all registers by @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4701 then totally screw them up by subsequent @code{.cfi_*} directives and when
4702 everything is hopelessly bad, use @code{.cfi_restore_state} to restore
4703 the previous saved state.
4704
4705 @section @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4706 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4707 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4708
4709 @section @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4710 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4711
4712 @section @code{.cfi_window_save}
4713 SPARC register window has been saved.
4714
4715 @section @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4716 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4717 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4718 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4719
4720 @section @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4721 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4722 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4723 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4724
4725 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4726 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4727 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4728 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4729 or another register.
4730
4731 @node Comm
4732 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4733
4734 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4735 @cindex symbol, common
4736 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4737 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4738 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4739 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4740 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4741 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4742 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4743 using the largest size.
4744
4745 @ifset COFF-ELF
4746 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4747 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4748 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4749 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4750 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4751 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4752 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4753 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
4754 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4755 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4756 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4757 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4758 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4759 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4760 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4761 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4762 @end ifset
4763
4764 @ifset HPPA
4765 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
4766 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4767 @end ifset
4768
4769 @node Data
4770 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4771
4772 @cindex @code{data} directive
4773 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4774 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4775 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4776 to zero.
4777
4778 @ifset COFF
4779 @node Def
4780 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
4781
4782 @cindex @code{def} directive
4783 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4784 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
4785 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4786 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4787 @ifset BOUT
4788
4789 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4790 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4791 but ignored.
4792 @end ifset
4793 @end ifset
4794
4795 @ifset aout-bout
4796 @node Desc
4797 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4798
4799 @cindex @code{desc} directive
4800 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
4801 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
4802 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
4803 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
4804
4805 @ifset COFF
4806 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
4807 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
4808 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
4809 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
4810 @end ifset
4811 @end ifset
4812
4813 @ifset COFF
4814 @node Dim
4815 @section @code{.dim}
4816
4817 @cindex @code{dim} directive
4818 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
4819 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
4820 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
4821 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
4822 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
4823 @ifset BOUT
4824
4825 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
4826 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
4827 ignores it.
4828 @end ifset
4829 @end ifset
4830
4831 @node Double
4832 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4833
4834 @cindex @code{double} directive
4835 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
4836 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4837 assembles floating point numbers.
4838 @ifset GENERIC
4839 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4840 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4841 @end ifset
4842 @ifclear GENERIC
4843 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4844 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
4845 in @sc{ieee} format.
4846 @end ifset
4847 @end ifclear
4848
4849 @node Eject
4850 @section @code{.eject}
4851
4852 @cindex @code{eject} directive
4853 @cindex new page, in listings
4854 @cindex page, in listings
4855 @cindex listing control: new page
4856 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
4857
4858 @node Else
4859 @section @code{.else}
4860
4861 @cindex @code{else} directive
4862 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4863 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
4864 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
4865 was false.
4866
4867 @node Elseif
4868 @section @code{.elseif}
4869
4870 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
4871 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4872 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
4873 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
4874
4875 @node End
4876 @section @code{.end}
4877
4878 @cindex @code{end} directive
4879 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
4880 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
4881
4882 @ifset COFF
4883 @node Endef
4884 @section @code{.endef}
4885
4886 @cindex @code{endef} directive
4887 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
4888 @code{.def}.
4889 @ifset BOUT
4890
4891 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
4892 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
4893 directive but ignores it.
4894 @end ifset
4895 @end ifset
4896
4897 @node Endfunc
4898 @section @code{.endfunc}
4899 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
4900 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
4901
4902 @node Endif
4903 @section @code{.endif}
4904
4905 @cindex @code{endif} directive
4906 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
4907 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
4908 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
4909
4910 @node Equ
4911 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4912
4913 @cindex @code{equ} directive
4914 @cindex assigning values to symbols
4915 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
4916 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
4917 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
4918
4919 @ifset HPPA
4920 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
4921 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
4922 @end ifset
4923
4924 @ifset Z80
4925 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
4926 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
4927 On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
4928 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
4929 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
4930 @end ifset
4931
4932 @node Equiv
4933 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4934 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
4935 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
4936 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
4937 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
4938 undefined.
4939
4940 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
4941 @smallexample
4942 .ifdef SYM
4943 .err
4944 .endif
4945 .equ SYM,VAL
4946 @end smallexample
4947 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
4948
4949 @node Eqv
4950 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4951 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
4952 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
4953 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
4954 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
4955 value is taken.
4956
4957 @node Err
4958 @section @code{.err}
4959 @cindex @code{err} directive
4960 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
4961 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
4962 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
4963
4964 @node Error
4965 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
4966 @cindex error directive
4967
4968 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
4969 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
4970 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
4971 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
4972
4973 @smallexample
4974 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
4975 @end smallexample
4976
4977 @node Exitm
4978 @section @code{.exitm}
4979 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
4980
4981 @node Extern
4982 @section @code{.extern}
4983
4984 @cindex @code{extern} directive
4985 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
4986 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
4987 all undefined symbols as external.
4988
4989 @node Fail
4990 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
4991
4992 @cindex @code{fail} directive
4993 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
4994 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
4995 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
4996 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
4997 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
4998
4999 @node File
5000 @section @code{.file}
5001 @cindex @code{file} directive
5002
5003 @ifclear no-file-dir
5004 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
5005 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
5006 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
5007
5008 @subheading Default Version
5009
5010 @cindex logical file name
5011 @cindex file name, logical
5012 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
5013 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
5014
5015 @smallexample
5016 .file @var{string}
5017 @end smallexample
5018
5019 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
5020 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
5021 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
5022 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
5023 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
5024
5025 @subheading DWARF2 Version
5026 @end ifclear
5027
5028 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
5029 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
5030
5031 @smallexample
5032 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
5033 @end smallexample
5034
5035 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
5036 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
5037 literal.
5038
5039 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
5040 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5041 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5042 entries will have.
5043
5044 @node Fill
5045 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5046
5047 @cindex @code{fill} directive
5048 @cindex writing patterns in memory
5049 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
5050 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5051 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
5052 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5053 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5054 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5055 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
5056 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5057 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5058 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5059 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
5060 compatible with other people's assemblers.
5061
5062 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5063 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5064 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5065 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5066
5067 @node Float
5068 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5069
5070 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
5071 @cindex @code{float} directive
5072 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5073 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5074 @ifset GENERIC
5075 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5076 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5077 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5078 @end ifset
5079 @ifclear GENERIC
5080 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5081 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5082 in @sc{ieee} format.
5083 @end ifset
5084 @end ifclear
5085
5086 @node Func
5087 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5088 @cindex @code{func} directive
5089 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5090 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5091 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5092 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5093 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5094 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5095 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5096 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5097
5098 @node Global
5099 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5100
5101 @cindex @code{global} directive
5102 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5103 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5104 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5105 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5106 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5107 from another file linked into the same program.
5108
5109 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5110 compatibility with other assemblers.
5111
5112 @ifset HPPA
5113 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5114 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5115 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5116 @end ifset
5117
5118 @ifset ELF
5119 @node Gnu_attribute
5120 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5121 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5122
5123 @node Hidden
5124 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5125
5126 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5127 @cindex visibility
5128 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5129 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5130 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5131
5132 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5133 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5134 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5135 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5136 @end ifset
5137
5138 @node hword
5139 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5140
5141 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5142 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5143 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5144 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5145 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5146 a 16 bit number for each.
5147
5148 @ifset GENERIC
5149 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5150 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5151 @end ifset
5152 @ifclear GENERIC
5153 @ifset W32
5154 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5155 @end ifset
5156 @ifset W16
5157 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5158 @end ifset
5159 @end ifclear
5160
5161 @node Ident
5162 @section @code{.ident}
5163
5164 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5165
5166 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5167 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5168 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5169 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5170 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5171 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5172 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5173
5174 @node If
5175 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5176
5177 @cindex conditional assembly
5178 @cindex @code{if} directive
5179 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5180 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5181 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5182 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5183 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5184 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5185 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5186 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5187
5188 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5189 @table @code
5190 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5191 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5192 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5193 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5194 is considered to be undefined.
5195
5196 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5197 @item .ifb @var{text}
5198 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5199
5200 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5201 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5202 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5203 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5204 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5205 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5206 string comparison is case sensitive.
5207
5208 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5209 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5210 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5211
5212 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5213 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5214 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5215
5216 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5217 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5218 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5219 equal to zero.
5220
5221 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5222 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5223 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5224
5225 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5226 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5227 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5228 to zero.
5229
5230 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5231 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5232 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5233
5234 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5235 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5236 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5237 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5238
5239 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5240 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5241 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5242 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5243
5244 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5245 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5246 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5247 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5248 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5249 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5250 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5251
5252 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5253 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5254 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5255 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5256
5257 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5258 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5259 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5260 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5261 @end table
5262
5263 @node Incbin
5264 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5265
5266 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5267 @cindex binary files, including
5268 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5269 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5270 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5271 around @var{file}.
5272
5273 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5274 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5275 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5276 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5277 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5278
5279 @node Include
5280 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5281
5282 @cindex @code{include} directive
5283 @cindex supporting files, including
5284 @cindex files, including
5285 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5286 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5287 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5288 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5289 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5290 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5291 around @var{file}.
5292
5293 @node Int
5294 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5295
5296 @cindex @code{int} directive
5297 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5298 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5299 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5300 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5301 of target the assembly is for.
5302
5303 @ifclear GENERIC
5304 @ifset H8
5305 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5306 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5307 32-bit integers.
5308 @end ifset
5309 @end ifclear
5310
5311 @ifset ELF
5312 @node Internal
5313 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5314
5315 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5316 @cindex visibility
5317 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5318 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5319 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5320
5321 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5322 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5323 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5324 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5325 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5326 @end ifset
5327
5328 @node Irp
5329 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5330
5331 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5332 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5333 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5334 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5335 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5336 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5337 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5338 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5339
5340 For example, assembling
5341
5342 @example
5343 .irp param,1,2,3
5344 move d\param,sp@@-
5345 .endr
5346 @end example
5347
5348 is equivalent to assembling
5349
5350 @example
5351 move d1,sp@@-
5352 move d2,sp@@-
5353 move d3,sp@@-
5354 @end example
5355
5356 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5357
5358 @node Irpc
5359 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5360
5361 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5362 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5363 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5364 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5365 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5366 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5367 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5368 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5369
5370 For example, assembling
5371
5372 @example
5373 .irpc param,123
5374 move d\param,sp@@-
5375 .endr
5376 @end example
5377
5378 is equivalent to assembling
5379
5380 @example
5381 move d1,sp@@-
5382 move d2,sp@@-
5383 move d3,sp@@-
5384 @end example
5385
5386 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5387 at @xref{Macro}.
5388
5389 @node Lcomm
5390 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5391
5392 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5393 @cindex local common symbols
5394 @cindex symbols, local common
5395 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5396 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5397 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5398 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5399 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5400 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5401
5402 @ifset GENERIC
5403 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5404 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5405 @end ifset
5406
5407 @ifset HPPA
5408 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5409 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5410 @end ifset
5411
5412 @node Lflags
5413 @section @code{.lflags}
5414
5415 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5416 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5417 assemblers, but ignores it.
5418
5419 @ifclear no-line-dir
5420 @node Line
5421 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5422
5423 @cindex @code{line} directive
5424 @cindex logical line number
5425 @ifset aout-bout
5426 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5427 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5428 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5429 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5430 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5431 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5432 @end ifset
5433
5434 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5435 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5436 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5437 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5438 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5439
5440 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5441 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5442 debugging.
5443 @end ifclear
5444
5445 @node Linkonce
5446 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5447 @cindex COMDAT
5448 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5449 @cindex common sections
5450 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5451 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5452 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5453 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5454 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5455 unique.
5456
5457 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5458 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5459 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5460
5461 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5462 following strings. For example:
5463 @smallexample
5464 .linkonce same_size
5465 @end smallexample
5466 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5467
5468 @table @code
5469 @item discard
5470 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5471
5472 @item one_only
5473 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5474
5475 @item same_size
5476 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5477
5478 @item same_contents
5479 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5480 @end table
5481
5482 @node List
5483 @section @code{.list}
5484
5485 @cindex @code{list} directive
5486 @cindex listing control, turning on
5487 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5488 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5489 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5490 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5491 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5492
5493 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5494 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5495 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5496
5497 @node Ln
5498 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5499
5500 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5501 @ifclear no-line-dir
5502 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5503 @end ifclear
5504 @ifset no-line-dir
5505 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5506 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5507 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5508 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5509 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5510 @ifset BOUT
5511
5512 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5513 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5514 output format.
5515 @end ifset
5516 @end ifset
5517
5518 @node Loc
5519 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5520 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5521 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5522 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5523 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5524 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5525 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5526 the row is added.
5527
5528 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5529
5530 @table @code
5531 @item basic_block
5532 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5533 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5534
5535 @item prologue_end
5536 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5537 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5538
5539 @item epilogue_begin
5540 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5541 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5542
5543 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5544 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5545 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5546 either 0 or 1.
5547
5548 @item isa @var{value}
5549 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5550 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5551
5552 @item discriminator @var{value}
5553 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5554 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5555
5556 @end table
5557
5558 @node Loc_mark_labels
5559 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5560 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5561 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5562 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5563 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5564 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5565 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5566 this function respectively.
5567
5568 @ifset ELF
5569 @node Local
5570 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5571
5572 @cindex @code{local} directive
5573 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5574 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5575 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5576 they will be created.
5577
5578 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5579 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5580 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5581 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5582 @end ifset
5583
5584 @node Long
5585 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5586
5587 @cindex @code{long} directive
5588 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5589
5590 @ignore
5591 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5592 @c what it really ought to do
5593 @node Lsym
5594 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5595
5596 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5597 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5598 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5599 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5600 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5601 the same as the expression value:
5602 @smallexample
5603 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5604 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5605 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5606 @end smallexample
5607 @noindent
5608 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5609 @end ignore
5610
5611 @node Macro
5612 @section @code{.macro}
5613
5614 @cindex macros
5615 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5616 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5617 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5618
5619 @example
5620 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5621 .long \from
5622 .if \to-\from
5623 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5624 .endif
5625 .endm
5626 @end example
5627
5628 @noindent
5629 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5630
5631 @example
5632 .long 0
5633 .long 1
5634 .long 2
5635 .long 3
5636 .long 4
5637 .long 5
5638 @end example
5639
5640 @ftable @code
5641 @item .macro @var{macname}
5642 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5643 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5644 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5645 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5646 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5647 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5648 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5649 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5650 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5651 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5652 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5653 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5654
5655 @table @code
5656 @item .macro comm
5657 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5658 arguments.
5659
5660 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5661 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5662 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5663 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5664 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5665
5666 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5667 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5668 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5669 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5670 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5671 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5672 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5673 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5674
5675 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5676 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5677 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5678 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5679 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5680
5681 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5682 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5683 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5684
5685 @end table
5686
5687 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5688 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5689 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5690 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5691 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5692 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5693 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5694 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5695 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5696 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5697 this macro definition:
5698
5699 @example
5700 .macro label l
5701 \l:
5702 .endm
5703 @end example
5704
5705 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5706 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5707 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5708 identifier.
5709
5710 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5711 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5712 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5713 length specifier like this:
5714
5715 @example
5716 .macro opcode base length
5717 \base.\length
5718 .endm
5719 @end example
5720
5721 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5722 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5723 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5724
5725 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5726
5727 @table @code
5728 @item Insert white space
5729 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5730 solution. eg:
5731
5732 @example
5733 .macro label l
5734 \l :
5735 .endm
5736 @end example
5737
5738 @item Use @samp{\()}
5739 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5740 the following text. eg:
5741
5742 @example
5743 .macro opcode base length
5744 \base\().\length
5745 .endm
5746 @end example
5747
5748 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5749 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5750 used as a separator. eg:
5751
5752 @example
5753 .altmacro
5754 .macro label l
5755 l&:
5756 .endm
5757 @end example
5758 @end table
5759
5760 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5761 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5762 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5763
5764 @item .endm
5765 @cindex @code{endm} directive
5766 Mark the end of a macro definition.
5767
5768 @item .exitm
5769 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
5770 Exit early from the current macro definition.
5771
5772 @cindex number of macros executed
5773 @cindex macros, count executed
5774 @item \@@
5775 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5776 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5777 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5778
5779 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5780 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5781 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5782 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5783 @end ftable
5784
5785 @node MRI
5786 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5787
5788 @cindex @code{mri} directive
5789 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5790 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
5791 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
5792 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5793 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5794
5795 @node Noaltmacro
5796 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
5797 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
5798
5799 @node Nolist
5800 @section @code{.nolist}
5801
5802 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
5803 @cindex listing control, turning off
5804 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
5805 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5806 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5807 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5808 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5809
5810 @node Octa
5811 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
5812
5813 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
5814 @cindex @code{octa} directive
5815 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5816 @cindex sixteen byte integer
5817 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
5818 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
5819
5820 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5821 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
5822
5823 @node Offset
5824 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
5825
5826 @cindex @code{offset} directive
5827 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
5828 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
5829 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
5830 directive.
5831
5832 @node Org
5833 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
5834
5835 @cindex @code{org} directive
5836 @cindex location counter, advancing
5837 @cindex advancing location counter
5838 @cindex current address, advancing
5839 Advance the location counter of the current section to
5840 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
5841 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
5842 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
5843 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
5844 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
5845 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
5846 is the same as the current subsection.
5847
5848 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
5849 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
5850 backwards.
5851
5852 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
5853 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
5854 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
5855 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
5856 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
5857 a chance to share your improved assembler.
5858
5859 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
5860 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
5861 people's assemblers.
5862
5863 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
5864 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
5865 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
5866 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
5867
5868 @node P2align
5869 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
5870
5871 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
5872 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
5873 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
5874 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
5875 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
5876 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
5877 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
5878 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
5879
5880 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
5881 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
5882 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
5883 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
5884 with no-op instructions.
5885
5886 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
5887 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
5888 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
5889 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
5890 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
5891 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
5892 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
5893
5894 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
5895 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
5896 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
5897 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
5898 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
5899 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
5900 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
5901 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
5902 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
5903 undefined.
5904
5905 @ifset ELF
5906 @node PopSection
5907 @section @code{.popsection}
5908
5909 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
5910 @cindex Section Stack
5911 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5912 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5913 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
5914 (@pxref{Previous}).
5915
5916 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
5917 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
5918 stack.
5919 @end ifset
5920
5921 @ifset ELF
5922 @node Previous
5923 @section @code{.previous}
5924
5925 @cindex @code{previous} directive
5926 @cindex Section Stack
5927 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5928 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5929 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
5930 (@pxref{PopSection}).
5931
5932 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
5933 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
5934 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
5935 subsections). For example:
5936
5937 @smallexample
5938 .section A
5939 .subsection 1
5940 .word 0x1234
5941 .subsection 2
5942 .word 0x5678
5943 .previous
5944 .word 0x9abc
5945 @end smallexample
5946
5947 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
5948 section A. Whilst:
5949
5950 @smallexample
5951 .section A
5952 .subsection 1
5953 # Now in section A subsection 1
5954 .word 0x1234
5955 .section B
5956 .subsection 0
5957 # Now in section B subsection 0
5958 .word 0x5678
5959 .subsection 1
5960 # Now in section B subsection 1
5961 .word 0x9abc
5962 .previous
5963 # Now in section B subsection 0
5964 .word 0xdef0
5965 @end smallexample
5966
5967 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
5968 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
5969
5970 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
5971 the top section on the section stack.
5972 @end ifset
5973
5974 @node Print
5975 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
5976
5977 @cindex @code{print} directive
5978 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
5979 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
5980
5981 @ifset ELF
5982 @node Protected
5983 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
5984
5985 @cindex @code{protected} directive
5986 @cindex visibility
5987 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5988 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
5989
5990 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5991 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5992 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
5993 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
5994 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
5995 this.
5996 @end ifset
5997
5998 @node Psize
5999 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
6000
6001 @cindex @code{psize} directive
6002 @cindex listing control: paper size
6003 @cindex paper size, for listings
6004 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
6005 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
6006
6007 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
6008 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
6009 default width is 200 columns.
6010
6011 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
6012 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
6013 @code{.eject}).
6014
6015 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
6016 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
6017
6018 @node Purgem
6019 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
6020
6021 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
6022 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
6023 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
6024
6025 @ifset ELF
6026 @node PushSection
6027 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
6028
6029 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
6030 @cindex Section Stack
6031 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6032 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6033 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6034 (@pxref{Previous}).
6035
6036 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
6037 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
6038 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
6039 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
6040 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6041 @end ifset
6042
6043 @node Quad
6044 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6045
6046 @cindex @code{quad} directive
6047 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
6048 each bignum, it emits
6049 @ifclear bignum-16
6050 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6051 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6052 @cindex eight-byte integer
6053 @cindex integer, 8-byte
6054
6055 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6056 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6057 @end ifclear
6058 @ifset bignum-16
6059 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6060 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6061 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
6062 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6063 @end ifset
6064
6065 @node Reloc
6066 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6067
6068 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
6069 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6070 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6071 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6072 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6073 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6074 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
6075 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6076 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6077 section.
6078
6079 @node Rept
6080 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6081
6082 @cindex @code{rept} directive
6083 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6084 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6085
6086 For example, assembling
6087
6088 @example
6089 .rept 3
6090 .long 0
6091 .endr
6092 @end example
6093
6094 is equivalent to assembling
6095
6096 @example
6097 .long 0
6098 .long 0
6099 .long 0
6100 @end example
6101
6102 @node Sbttl
6103 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6104
6105 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6106 @cindex subtitles for listings
6107 @cindex listing control: subtitle
6108 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6109 title line) when generating assembly listings.
6110
6111 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6112 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6113
6114 @ifset COFF
6115 @node Scl
6116 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6117
6118 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6119 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6120 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6121 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6122 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6123 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6124 symbolic debugging information.
6125 @ifset BOUT
6126
6127 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
6128 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
6129 accepts this directive but ignores it.
6130 @end ifset
6131 @end ifset
6132
6133 @ifset COFF-ELF
6134 @node Section
6135 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6136
6137 @cindex named section
6138 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6139 named @var{name}.
6140
6141 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6142 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6143 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6144
6145 @ifset COFF
6146 @ifset ELF
6147 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6148 @subheading COFF Version
6149 @end ifset
6150
6151 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6152 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6153 ways:
6154
6155 @smallexample
6156 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6157 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6158 @end smallexample
6159
6160 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6161 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6162 @table @code
6163 @item b
6164 bss section (uninitialized data)
6165 @item n
6166 section is not loaded
6167 @item w
6168 writable section
6169 @item d
6170 data section
6171 @item e
6172 exclude section from linking
6173 @item r
6174 read-only section
6175 @item x
6176 executable section
6177 @item s
6178 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6179 @item a
6180 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6181 @item y
6182 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6183 @item 0-9
6184 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6185 @end table
6186
6187 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6188 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6189 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6190 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6191 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6192
6193 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6194 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6195 @end ifset
6196
6197 @ifset ELF
6198 @ifset COFF
6199 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6200 @subheading ELF Version
6201 @end ifset
6202
6203 @cindex Section Stack
6204 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6205 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6206 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6207 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6208
6209 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6210 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6211
6212 @smallexample
6213 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6214 @end smallexample
6215
6216 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6217 combination of the following characters:
6218 @table @code
6219 @item a
6220 section is allocatable
6221 @item e
6222 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6223 @item w
6224 section is writable
6225 @item x
6226 section is executable
6227 @item M
6228 section is mergeable
6229 @item S
6230 section contains zero terminated strings
6231 @item G
6232 section is a member of a section group
6233 @item T
6234 section is used for thread-local-storage
6235 @item ?
6236 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6237 @end table
6238
6239 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6240 @table @code
6241 @item @@progbits
6242 section contains data
6243 @item @@nobits
6244 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6245 @item @@note
6246 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6247 @item @@init_array
6248 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6249 @item @@fini_array
6250 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6251 @item @@preinit_array
6252 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6253 @end table
6254
6255 Many targets only support the first three section types.
6256
6257 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6258 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6259 @code{%} character.
6260
6261 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6262 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6263
6264 @smallexample
6265 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6266 @end smallexample
6267
6268 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6269 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6270 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6271 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6272 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6273 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6274 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6275 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6276 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6277
6278 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6279 be present along with an additional field like this:
6280
6281 @smallexample
6282 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6283 @end smallexample
6284
6285 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6286 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6287 @table @code
6288 @item comdat
6289 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6290 @item .gnu.linkonce
6291 an alias for comdat
6292 @end table
6293
6294 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6295 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6296
6297 @smallexample
6298 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6299 @end smallexample
6300
6301 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6302 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6303 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6304 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6305 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6306 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6307
6308 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6309 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6310 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6311 executable. The section will contain data.
6312
6313 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6314 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6315
6316 @smallexample
6317 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6318 @end smallexample
6319
6320 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6321 separated flags:
6322 @table @code
6323 @item #alloc
6324 section is allocatable
6325 @item #write
6326 section is writable
6327 @item #execinstr
6328 section is executable
6329 @item #exclude
6330 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6331 @item #tls
6332 section is used for thread local storage
6333 @end table
6334
6335 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6336 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6337 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6338 work.
6339 @end ifset
6340 @end ifset
6341
6342 @node Set
6343 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6344
6345 @cindex @code{set} directive
6346 @cindex symbol value, setting
6347 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6348 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6349 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6350 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6351
6352 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly.
6353
6354 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6355 file is the last value stored into it.
6356
6357 @ifset Z80
6358 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6359 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6360 @end ifset
6361
6362 @node Short
6363 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6364
6365 @cindex @code{short} directive
6366 @ifset GENERIC
6367 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6368 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6369
6370 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6371 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6372 @end ifset
6373 @ifclear GENERIC
6374 @ifset W16
6375 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6376 @end ifset
6377 @ifset W32
6378 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6379 a 16 bit number for each.
6380 @end ifset
6381 @end ifclear
6382
6383 @node Single
6384 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6385
6386 @cindex @code{single} directive
6387 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6388 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6389 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6390 @ifset GENERIC
6391 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6392 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6393 @end ifset
6394 @ifclear GENERIC
6395 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6396 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6397 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6398 @end ifset
6399 @end ifclear
6400
6401 @ifset COFF-ELF
6402 @node Size
6403 @section @code{.size}
6404
6405 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6406
6407 @ifset COFF
6408 @ifset ELF
6409 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6410 @subheading COFF Version
6411 @end ifset
6412
6413 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6414 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6415 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6416
6417 @smallexample
6418 .size @var{expression}
6419 @end smallexample
6420
6421 @ifset BOUT
6422 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6423 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6424 ignores it.
6425 @end ifset
6426 @end ifset
6427
6428 @ifset ELF
6429 @ifset COFF
6430 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6431 @subheading ELF Version
6432 @end ifset
6433
6434 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6435 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6436
6437 @smallexample
6438 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6439 @end smallexample
6440
6441 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6442 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6443 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6444 symbols.
6445 @end ifset
6446 @end ifset
6447
6448 @ifclear no-space-dir
6449 @node Skip
6450 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6451
6452 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6453 @cindex filling memory
6454 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6455 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6456 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6457 @samp{.space}.
6458 @end ifclear
6459
6460 @node Sleb128
6461 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6462
6463 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6464 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6465 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6466 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6467
6468 @ifclear no-space-dir
6469 @node Space
6470 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6471
6472 @cindex @code{space} directive
6473 @cindex filling memory
6474 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6475 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6476 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6477 as @samp{.skip}.
6478
6479 @ifset HPPA
6480 @quotation
6481 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6482 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6483 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6484 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6485 for a summary.
6486 @end quotation
6487 @end ifset
6488 @end ifclear
6489
6490 @ifset have-stabs
6491 @node Stab
6492 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6493
6494 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6495 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6496 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6497 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6498 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6499 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6500 Up to five fields are required:
6501
6502 @table @var
6503 @item string
6504 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6505 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6506 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6507 using this field.
6508
6509 @item type
6510 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6511 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6512 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6513
6514 @item other
6515 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6516 low 8 bits of this expression.
6517
6518 @item desc
6519 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6520 bits of this expression.
6521
6522 @item value
6523 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6524 @end table
6525
6526 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6527 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6528 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6529 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6530
6531 @table @code
6532 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6533 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6534
6535 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6536 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6537 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6538 strings.
6539
6540 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6541 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6542 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6543 assembled.
6544
6545 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6546 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6547 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6548
6549 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6550 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6551 All five fields are specified.
6552 @end table
6553 @end ifset
6554 @c end have-stabs
6555
6556 @node String
6557 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6558 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6559
6560 @cindex string, copying to object file
6561 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6562 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6563 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6564 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6565 @cindex @code{string} directive
6566 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6567 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6568 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6569 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6570
6571 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6572 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6573 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6574 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6575
6576 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6577 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6578 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6579 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6580
6581 Example:
6582 @smallexample
6583 .string32 "BYE"
6584 expands to:
6585 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6586 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6587 @end smallexample
6588
6589
6590 @node Struct
6591 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6592
6593 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6594 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6595 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6596 @smallexample
6597 .struct 0
6598 field1:
6599 .struct field1 + 4
6600 field2:
6601 .struct field2 + 4
6602 field3:
6603 @end smallexample
6604 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6605 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6606 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6607 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6608 before further assembly.
6609
6610 @ifset ELF
6611 @node SubSection
6612 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6613
6614 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6615 @cindex Section Stack
6616 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6617 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6618 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6619 (@pxref{Previous}).
6620
6621 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6622 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6623 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6624 @end ifset
6625
6626 @ifset ELF
6627 @node Symver
6628 @section @code{.symver}
6629 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6630 @cindex symbol versioning
6631 @cindex versions of symbols
6632 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6633 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6634 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6635 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6636 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6637 shared library.
6638
6639 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6640 @smallexample
6641 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6642 @end smallexample
6643 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6644 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6645 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6646 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6647 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6648 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6649 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6650 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6651 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6652 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6653 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6654 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6655 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6656 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6657
6658 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6659 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6660 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6661 symbol table.
6662
6663 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6664 @smallexample
6665 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6666 @end smallexample
6667 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6668 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6669 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6670 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6671
6672 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6673 @smallexample
6674 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6675 @end smallexample
6676 When @var{name} is not defined within the
6677 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6678 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6679 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6680 @end ifset
6681
6682 @ifset COFF
6683 @node Tag
6684 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6685
6686 @cindex COFF structure debugging
6687 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
6688 @cindex @code{tag} directive
6689 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6690 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
6691 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
6692 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6693 @ifset BOUT
6694
6695 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6696 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6697 ignores it.
6698 @end ifset
6699 @end ifset
6700
6701 @node Text
6702 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6703
6704 @cindex @code{text} directive
6705 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6706 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6707 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6708 is used.
6709
6710 @node Title
6711 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6712
6713 @cindex @code{title} directive
6714 @cindex listing control: title line
6715 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6716 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6717
6718 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6719 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6720
6721 @ifset COFF-ELF
6722 @node Type
6723 @section @code{.type}
6724
6725 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6726
6727 @ifset COFF
6728 @ifset ELF
6729 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6730 @subheading COFF Version
6731 @end ifset
6732
6733 @cindex COFF symbol type
6734 @cindex symbol type, COFF
6735 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
6736 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
6737 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6738
6739 @smallexample
6740 .type @var{int}
6741 @end smallexample
6742
6743 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
6744 entry.
6745
6746 @ifset BOUT
6747 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
6748 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
6749 directive but ignores it.
6750 @end ifset
6751 @end ifset
6752
6753 @ifset ELF
6754 @ifset COFF
6755 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6756 @subheading ELF Version
6757 @end ifset
6758
6759 @cindex ELF symbol type
6760 @cindex symbol type, ELF
6761 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
6762 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
6763
6764 @smallexample
6765 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
6766 @end smallexample
6767
6768 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
6769 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
6770 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
6771 compatibility with various other assemblers.
6772
6773 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
6774 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
6775 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
6776 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
6777 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
6778 assemblers.
6779
6780 The syntaxes supported are:
6781
6782 @smallexample
6783 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
6784 .type <name>,#<type>
6785 .type <name>,@@<type>
6786 .type <name>,%<type>
6787 .type <name>,"<type>"
6788 @end smallexample
6789
6790 The types supported are:
6791
6792 @table @gcctabopt
6793 @item STT_FUNC
6794 @itemx function
6795 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
6796
6797 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
6798 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
6799 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
6800 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
6801
6802 @item STT_OBJECT
6803 @itemx object
6804 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
6805
6806 @item STT_TLS
6807 @itemx tls_object
6808 Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
6809
6810 @item STT_COMMON
6811 @itemx common
6812 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
6813
6814 @item STT_NOTYPE
6815 @itemx notype
6816 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
6817
6818 @item gnu_unique_object
6819 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
6820 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
6821 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
6822 systems).
6823
6824 @end table
6825
6826 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
6827
6828 @end ifset
6829 @end ifset
6830
6831 @node Uleb128
6832 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
6833
6834 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
6835 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
6836 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6837 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
6838
6839 @ifset COFF
6840 @node Val
6841 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
6842
6843 @cindex @code{val} directive
6844 @cindex COFF value attribute
6845 @cindex value attribute, COFF
6846 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
6847 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
6848 entry.
6849 @ifset BOUT
6850
6851 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
6852 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
6853 @end ifset
6854 @end ifset
6855
6856 @ifset ELF
6857 @node Version
6858 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
6859
6860 @cindex @code{version} directive
6861 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
6862 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
6863 @end ifset
6864
6865 @ifset ELF
6866 @node VTableEntry
6867 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
6868
6869 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
6870 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
6871 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
6872
6873 @node VTableInherit
6874 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
6875
6876 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
6877 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
6878 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
6879 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
6880 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
6881 @end ifset
6882
6883 @node Warning
6884 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
6885 @cindex warning directive
6886 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
6887 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
6888
6889 @node Weak
6890 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
6891
6892 @cindex @code{weak} directive
6893 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6894 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6895
6896 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
6897 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6898 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6899
6900 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
6901 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
6902 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
6903
6904 @node Weakref
6905 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
6906
6907 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
6908 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
6909 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
6910 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
6911 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
6912 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
6913
6914 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
6915 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
6916 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
6917 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
6918 had the references to the alias removed.
6919
6920 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
6921 within the assembler.
6922
6923 @node Word
6924 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
6925
6926 @cindex @code{word} directive
6927 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
6928 separated by commas.
6929 @ifclear GENERIC
6930 @ifset W32
6931 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
6932 @end ifset
6933 @ifset W16
6934 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
6935 @end ifset
6936 @end ifclear
6937 @ifset GENERIC
6938
6939 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
6940 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
6941 @end ifset
6942
6943 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
6944 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
6945 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6946 @cindex difference tables altered
6947 @cindex altered difference tables
6948 @quotation
6949 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
6950 @end quotation
6951
6952 @ifset GENERIC
6953 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
6954 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
6955 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
6956 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
6957
6958 @end ifset
6959 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
6960 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
6961 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
6962 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
6963 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
6964 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
6965 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
6966 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
6967 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
6968 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
6969 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
6970 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
6971 @code{sym2}.
6972
6973 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
6974 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
6975 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
6976 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
6977 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
6978 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
6979 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
6980
6981 @ifset INTERNALS
6982 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
6983 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
6984 assembly language programmers.
6985 @end ifset
6986 @end ifset
6987 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6988
6989 @node Deprecated
6990 @section Deprecated Directives
6991
6992 @cindex deprecated directives
6993 @cindex obsolescent directives
6994 One day these directives won't work.
6995 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
6996 @table @t
6997 @item .abort
6998 @item .line
6999 @end table
7000
7001 @ifset ELF
7002 @node Object Attributes
7003 @chapter Object Attributes
7004 @cindex object attributes
7005
7006 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
7007 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
7008 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
7009 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
7010 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
7011 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
7012 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
7013 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
7014 newer generation at run-time.
7015
7016 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
7017 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
7018 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
7019 correctly.
7020
7021 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
7022 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
7023 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
7024 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
7025 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
7026 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
7027
7028 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
7029 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
7030
7031 @menu
7032 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7033 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
7034 @end menu
7035
7036 @node GNU Object Attributes
7037 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7038
7039 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
7040 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7041
7042 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7043 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7044 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
7045 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7046 architecture-dependent ones.
7047
7048 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7049
7050 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7051
7052 @table @r
7053 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
7054 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
7055 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
7056 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
7057 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7058 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7059 @end table
7060
7061 @subsection MIPS Attributes
7062
7063 @table @r
7064 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7065 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7066
7067 @itemize @bullet
7068 @item
7069 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7070 @item
7071 1 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
7072 double-precision FPU.
7073 @item
7074 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7075 @item
7076 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7077 @item
7078 4 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
7079 floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
7080 number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
7081 @item
7082 5 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
7083 with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
7084 general-purpose registers.
7085 @item
7086 6 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7087 registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
7088 @item
7089 7 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7090 registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
7091 direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
7092 @end itemize
7093 @end table
7094
7095 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
7096
7097 @table @r
7098 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7099 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7100
7101 @itemize @bullet
7102 @item
7103 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7104 @item
7105 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7106 @item
7107 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7108 @item
7109 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7110 @end itemize
7111
7112 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7113 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7114
7115 @itemize @bullet
7116 @item
7117 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7118 @item
7119 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7120 @item
7121 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7122 @item
7123 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7124 @end itemize
7125 @end table
7126
7127 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7128 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7129
7130 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7131 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7132 mailing list.
7133
7134 @itemize @bullet
7135 @item
7136 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7137 @item
7138 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7139 @item
7140 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7141 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7142 @item
7143 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7144 @item
7145 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7146 @item
7147 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7148 @end itemize
7149
7150 @end ifset
7151
7152 @ifset GENERIC
7153 @node Machine Dependencies
7154 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7155
7156 @cindex machine dependencies
7157 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7158 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7159 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7160 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7161 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7162 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7163 optimization.
7164
7165 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7166 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7167 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7168
7169 @menu
7170 @ifset AARCH64
7171 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7172 @end ifset
7173 @ifset ALPHA
7174 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7175 @end ifset
7176 @ifset ARC
7177 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7178 @end ifset
7179 @ifset ARM
7180 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7181 @end ifset
7182 @ifset AVR
7183 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7184 @end ifset
7185 @ifset Blackfin
7186 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7187 @end ifset
7188 @ifset CR16
7189 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7190 @end ifset
7191 @ifset CRIS
7192 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7193 @end ifset
7194 @ifset D10V
7195 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7196 @end ifset
7197 @ifset D30V
7198 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7199 @end ifset
7200 @ifset EPIPHANY
7201 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7202 @end ifset
7203 @ifset H8/300
7204 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7205 @end ifset
7206 @ifset HPPA
7207 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7208 @end ifset
7209 @ifset I370
7210 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
7211 @end ifset
7212 @ifset I80386
7213 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7214 @end ifset
7215 @ifset I860
7216 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
7217 @end ifset
7218 @ifset I960
7219 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
7220 @end ifset
7221 @ifset IA64
7222 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7223 @end ifset
7224 @ifset IP2K
7225 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7226 @end ifset
7227 @ifset LM32
7228 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7229 @end ifset
7230 @ifset M32C
7231 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7232 @end ifset
7233 @ifset M32R
7234 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7235 @end ifset
7236 @ifset M680X0
7237 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7238 @end ifset
7239 @ifset M68HC11
7240 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7241 @end ifset
7242 @ifset METAG
7243 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7244 @end ifset
7245 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7246 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7247 @end ifset
7248 @ifset MIPS
7249 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7250 @end ifset
7251 @ifset MMIX
7252 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7253 @end ifset
7254 @ifset MSP430
7255 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7256 @end ifset
7257 @ifset NDS32
7258 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7259 @end ifset
7260 @ifset NIOSII
7261 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7262 @end ifset
7263 @ifset NS32K
7264 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7265 @end ifset
7266 @ifset SH
7267 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7268 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7269 @end ifset
7270 @ifset PDP11
7271 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7272 @end ifset
7273 @ifset PJ
7274 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7275 @end ifset
7276 @ifset PPC
7277 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7278 @end ifset
7279 @ifset RL78
7280 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7281 @end ifset
7282 @ifset RX
7283 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7284 @end ifset
7285 @ifset S390
7286 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7287 @end ifset
7288 @ifset SCORE
7289 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7290 @end ifset
7291 @ifset SPARC
7292 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7293 @end ifset
7294 @ifset TIC54X
7295 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7296 @end ifset
7297 @ifset TIC6X
7298 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7299 @end ifset
7300 @ifset TILEGX
7301 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7302 @end ifset
7303 @ifset TILEPRO
7304 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7305 @end ifset
7306 @ifset V850
7307 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7308 @end ifset
7309 @ifset VAX
7310 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7311 @end ifset
7312 @ifset VISIUM
7313 * Visium-Dependent:: Visium Dependent Features
7314 @end ifset
7315 @ifset XGATE
7316 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features
7317 @end ifset
7318 @ifset XSTORMY16
7319 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7320 @end ifset
7321 @ifset XTENSA
7322 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7323 @end ifset
7324 @ifset Z80
7325 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7326 @end ifset
7327 @ifset Z8000
7328 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7329 @end ifset
7330 @end menu
7331
7332 @lowersections
7333 @end ifset
7334
7335 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7336 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7337 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7338 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7339 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7340 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7341 @c in both conditional blocks.
7342
7343 @ifset AARCH64
7344 @include c-aarch64.texi
7345 @end ifset
7346
7347 @ifset ALPHA
7348 @include c-alpha.texi
7349 @end ifset
7350
7351 @ifset ARC
7352 @include c-arc.texi
7353 @end ifset
7354
7355 @ifset ARM
7356 @include c-arm.texi
7357 @end ifset
7358
7359 @ifset AVR
7360 @include c-avr.texi
7361 @end ifset
7362
7363 @ifset Blackfin
7364 @include c-bfin.texi
7365 @end ifset
7366
7367 @ifset CR16
7368 @include c-cr16.texi
7369 @end ifset
7370
7371 @ifset CRIS
7372 @include c-cris.texi
7373 @end ifset
7374
7375 @ifset Renesas-all
7376 @ifclear GENERIC
7377 @node Machine Dependencies
7378 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7379
7380 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7381 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7382 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7383 family.
7384
7385 @menu
7386 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7387 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7388 @end menu
7389 @lowersections
7390 @end ifclear
7391 @end ifset
7392
7393 @ifset D10V
7394 @include c-d10v.texi
7395 @end ifset
7396
7397 @ifset D30V
7398 @include c-d30v.texi
7399 @end ifset
7400
7401 @ifset EPIPHANY
7402 @include c-epiphany.texi
7403 @end ifset
7404
7405 @ifset H8/300
7406 @include c-h8300.texi
7407 @end ifset
7408
7409 @ifset HPPA
7410 @include c-hppa.texi
7411 @end ifset
7412
7413 @ifset I370
7414 @include c-i370.texi
7415 @end ifset
7416
7417 @ifset I80386
7418 @include c-i386.texi
7419 @end ifset
7420
7421 @ifset I860
7422 @include c-i860.texi
7423 @end ifset
7424
7425 @ifset I960
7426 @include c-i960.texi
7427 @end ifset
7428
7429 @ifset IA64
7430 @include c-ia64.texi
7431 @end ifset
7432
7433 @ifset IP2K
7434 @include c-ip2k.texi
7435 @end ifset
7436
7437 @ifset LM32
7438 @include c-lm32.texi
7439 @end ifset
7440
7441 @ifset M32C
7442 @include c-m32c.texi
7443 @end ifset
7444
7445 @ifset M32R
7446 @include c-m32r.texi
7447 @end ifset
7448
7449 @ifset M680X0
7450 @include c-m68k.texi
7451 @end ifset
7452
7453 @ifset M68HC11
7454 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7455 @end ifset
7456
7457 @ifset METAG
7458 @include c-metag.texi
7459 @end ifset
7460
7461 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7462 @include c-microblaze.texi
7463 @end ifset
7464
7465 @ifset MIPS
7466 @include c-mips.texi
7467 @end ifset
7468
7469 @ifset MMIX
7470 @include c-mmix.texi
7471 @end ifset
7472
7473 @ifset MSP430
7474 @include c-msp430.texi
7475 @end ifset
7476
7477 @ifset NDS32
7478 @include c-nds32.texi
7479 @end ifset
7480
7481 @ifset NIOSII
7482 @include c-nios2.texi
7483 @end ifset
7484
7485 @ifset NS32K
7486 @include c-ns32k.texi
7487 @end ifset
7488
7489 @ifset PDP11
7490 @include c-pdp11.texi
7491 @end ifset
7492
7493 @ifset PJ
7494 @include c-pj.texi
7495 @end ifset
7496
7497 @ifset PPC
7498 @include c-ppc.texi
7499 @end ifset
7500
7501 @ifset RL78
7502 @include c-rl78.texi
7503 @end ifset
7504
7505 @ifset RX
7506 @include c-rx.texi
7507 @end ifset
7508
7509 @ifset S390
7510 @include c-s390.texi
7511 @end ifset
7512
7513 @ifset SCORE
7514 @include c-score.texi
7515 @end ifset
7516
7517 @ifset SH
7518 @include c-sh.texi
7519 @include c-sh64.texi
7520 @end ifset
7521
7522 @ifset SPARC
7523 @include c-sparc.texi
7524 @end ifset
7525
7526 @ifset TIC54X
7527 @include c-tic54x.texi
7528 @end ifset
7529
7530 @ifset TIC6X
7531 @include c-tic6x.texi
7532 @end ifset
7533
7534 @ifset TILEGX
7535 @include c-tilegx.texi
7536 @end ifset
7537
7538 @ifset TILEPRO
7539 @include c-tilepro.texi
7540 @end ifset
7541
7542 @ifset V850
7543 @include c-v850.texi
7544 @end ifset
7545
7546 @ifset VAX
7547 @include c-vax.texi
7548 @end ifset
7549
7550 @ifset VISIUM
7551 @include c-visium.texi
7552 @end ifset
7553
7554 @ifset XGATE
7555 @include c-xgate.texi
7556 @end ifset
7557
7558 @ifset XSTORMY16
7559 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7560 @end ifset
7561
7562 @ifset XTENSA
7563 @include c-xtensa.texi
7564 @end ifset
7565
7566 @ifset Z80
7567 @include c-z80.texi
7568 @end ifset
7569
7570 @ifset Z8000
7571 @include c-z8k.texi
7572 @end ifset
7573
7574 @ifset GENERIC
7575 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7576 @raisesections
7577 @end ifset
7578
7579 @node Reporting Bugs
7580 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7581 @cindex bugs in assembler
7582 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7583
7584 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7585
7586 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7587 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7588 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7589 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7590
7591 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7592 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7593
7594 @menu
7595 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7596 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7597 @end menu
7598
7599 @node Bug Criteria
7600 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7601 @cindex bug criteria
7602
7603 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7604
7605 @itemize @bullet
7606 @cindex fatal signal
7607 @cindex assembler crash
7608 @cindex crash of assembler
7609 @item
7610 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7611 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7612
7613 @cindex error on valid input
7614 @item
7615 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7616
7617 @cindex invalid input
7618 @item
7619 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7620 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7621 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7622
7623 @item
7624 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7625 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7626 @end itemize
7627
7628 @node Bug Reporting
7629 @section How to Report Bugs
7630 @cindex bug reports
7631 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7632
7633 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7634 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7635 contact that organization first.
7636
7637 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7638 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7639 distribution.
7640
7641 @ifset BUGURL
7642 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7643 to @value{BUGURL}.
7644 @end ifset
7645
7646 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7647 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7648 fact or leave it out, state it!
7649
7650 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7651 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
7652 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
7653 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7654 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7655 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7656 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
7657 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7658 and the most helpful.
7659
7660 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7661 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7662 that the bug has not been reported previously.
7663
7664 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7665 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7666 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7667 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7668
7669 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7670
7671 @itemize @bullet
7672 @item
7673 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7674 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7675
7676 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7677 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7678
7679 @item
7680 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7681
7682 @item
7683 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7684 version number.
7685
7686 @item
7687 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7688 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7689
7690 @item
7691 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7692 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7693 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7694
7695 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7696 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7697
7698 @item
7699 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
7700 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7701 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
7702 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
7703 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
7704 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
7705 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
7706
7707 @item
7708 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7709 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7710
7711 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
7712 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7713 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
7714 make a mistake.
7715
7716 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
7717 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
7718 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
7719 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
7720 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
7721 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
7722 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
7723 observations.
7724
7725 @item
7726 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
7727 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
7728 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
7729 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
7730 by line number.
7731
7732 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7733 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7734 @end itemize
7735
7736 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7737
7738 @itemize @bullet
7739 @item
7740 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7741
7742 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7743 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7744 changes will not affect it.
7745
7746 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7747 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7748 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7749 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7750
7751 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7752 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7753 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7754 less time, and so on.
7755
7756 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7757 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7758
7759 @item
7760 A patch for the bug.
7761
7762 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7763 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7764 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7765 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7766
7767 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
7768 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
7769 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
7770 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
7771
7772 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7773 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7774 help us to understand.
7775
7776 @item
7777 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7778
7779 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7780 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7781 @end itemize
7782
7783 @node Acknowledgements
7784 @chapter Acknowledgements
7785
7786 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
7787 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
7788 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
7789 @c (October 2012),
7790 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
7791
7792 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
7793 more details?}
7794
7795 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
7796 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
7797 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
7798
7799 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
7800 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
7801 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
7802 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
7803 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
7804 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
7805 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
7806 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
7807 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
7808 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
7809
7810 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
7811 in format-specific I/O modules.
7812
7813 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
7814 has done much work with it since.
7815
7816 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
7817
7818 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
7819
7820 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
7821 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
7822
7823 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
7824 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
7825 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
7826 support a.out format.
7827
7828 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
7829 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
7830 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
7831 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
7832 targets.
7833
7834 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
7835 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
7836 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
7837 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
7838 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
7839 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
7840 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
7841
7842 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
7843 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
7844 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
7845 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
7846
7847 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
7848
7849 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
7850
7851 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
7852 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
7853 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
7854 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
7855
7856 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
7857 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
7858 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
7859 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
7860 and some initial 64-bit support).
7861
7862 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
7863
7864 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
7865 support for openVMS/Alpha.
7866
7867 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
7868 flavors.
7869
7870 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
7871 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
7872
7873 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
7874 configuration enhancements.
7875
7876 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
7877
7878 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
7879 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
7880 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
7881 intentionally leaving anyone out.
7882
7883 @node GNU Free Documentation License
7884 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7885 @include fdl.texi
7886
7887 @node AS Index
7888 @unnumbered AS Index
7889
7890 @printindex cp
7891
7892 @bye
7893 @c Local Variables:
7894 @c fill-column: 79
7895 @c End:
This page took 0.199284 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.